Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 PDF

1 of 290
1 of 290

Summary of Content for Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 PDF

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:13:54+01:00; Page 1

evastarck

VOLVO S60

Owners Manual

DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your

Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of

you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the

world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current

safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend

that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions

and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 1

evastarck

Table of contents

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

00 00 Introduction

Important information................................. 8

Volvo and the environment....................... 11

01 01 Safety

Seatbelts................................................... 16

Airbag system........................................... 18

Airbags (SRS)............................................ 19

Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*. 22

Side airbags (SIPS bags).......................... 24

Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 26

WHIPS....................................................... 27

When the systems deploy......................... 29

Child safety............................................... 30 02 02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive car.................... 38

Overview, right-hand drive car.................. 40

Combined instrument panel...................... 42

Indicator and warning symbols................. 44

Information display................................... 47

Switches in the centre console................. 48

Lighting panel........................................... 51

Left-hand stalk switch............................... 53

Trip computer*.......................................... 54

Right-hand stalk switch............................ 56

Cruise control*.......................................... 58

Steering wheel adjustment, parking brake......................................................... 60

Electrical socket, cigarette lighter............. 61

Power windows......................................... 62

Rearview and door mirrors....................... 64

Power sunroof*......................................... 69

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 2

evastarck

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

03 03 Climate control

General information on climate control..... 74

Manual climate control, AC....................... 76

Electronic climate control, ECC*............... 78

Air distribution........................................... 81

Fuel-driven parking heater*....................... 82

04 04 Interior

Front seats................................................ 88

Interior lighting.......................................... 90

Storage spaces in the passenger com- partment.................................................... 92

Rear seat................................................... 96

Cargo area................................................ 97

05 05 Locks and alarm

Keys and remote controls....................... 102

Locking and unlocking............................ 104

Child safety locks.................................... 107

Alarm*...................................................... 108

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 3

evastarck

Table of contents

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 06 Starting and driving

General.................................................... 114

Refuelling................................................ 116

Starting the car....................................... 118

Manual gearbox...................................... 120

Automatic gearbox.................................. 121

All-wheel drive AWD*........................... 124

Brake system.......................................... 125

Stability and traction control system*..... 127

Active chassis FOUR-C*...................... 129

Parking assistance*................................. 130

Towing and recovery.............................. 132

Start assistance...................................... 134

Driving with a trailer................................ 135

Towing equipment*................................. 137

Detachable towbar*................................ 139

Load on the roof..................................... 143

Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 145

BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*... 152

07 07 Wheels and tyres

General.................................................... 158

Tyre pressure.......................................... 161

Warning triangle* and spare wheel......... 163

Tyre pressure monitoring*....................... 165

Changing wheels.................................... 167

Emergency puncture repair*................... 169

08 08 Car care

Cleaning.................................................. 176

Touching up paintwork........................... 179

Rustproofing........................................... 180

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 4

evastarck

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

09 09 Maintenance and service

Volvo service........................................... 184

Self-maintenance.................................... 185

Bonnet and engine compartment........... 186

Diesel...................................................... 188

Oils and fluids......................................... 189

Wiper blades........................................... 193

Battery..................................................... 194

Replacing bulbs...................................... 196

Fuses....................................................... 203 10 10 Infotainment system

Overview HU-450.................................... 214

Overview HU-650.................................... 215

Overview HU-850.................................... 216

Audio functions HU-450/650/850........... 217

Audio functions HU-450......................... 219

Audio functions HU-650/850.................. 220

Radio functions HU-450/650/850........... 222

Radio functions HU-450......................... 224

Radio functions HU-650/850.................. 225

Radio functions HU-450/650/850........... 226

Cassette player HU-450......................... 231

CD player HU-650................................... 233

Internal CD changer HU-850.................. 234

External CD changer HU-450/650/850*.. 235

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850...... 236

Technical data......................................... 238

Phone functions*..................................... 239

Call options............................................. 242

Memory functions................................... 245

Menu functions....................................... 247

Miscellaneous information...................... 252

11 11 Specifications

Type designation..................................... 256

Dimensions and weights......................... 258

Engine specifications.............................. 260

Engine oil................................................ 262

Fluids and lubricants............................... 264

Fuel......................................................... 266

Catalytic converter.................................. 269

Electrical system..................................... 270

Type approval......................................... 272

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 5

evastarck

Table of contents

6

12 12 Alphabetical Index

Alphabetical Index.................................. 273

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 6

evastarck

Table of contents

7

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 7

evastarck

Introduction

Important information

8

Reading the Owner's Manual

Introduction A good way of getting to know your new car is

to read the owner's manual, ideally before your

first journey. This will give you the opportunity

to familiarise yourself with new functions, to

see how best to handle the car in different sit-

uations, and to make the best use of all the

car's features. Please pay attention to the

safety instructions contained in the manual.

The equipment described in the owner's man-

ual is not present in all cars . In addition to

standard equipment, this manual also

describes options (factory fitted equipment)

and certain accessories (retrofitted extra

equipment). If you are uncertain over what is

standard or option/accessory then contact

your Volvo dealer.

Volvo cars are adapted for the varying require-

ments of different markets, as well as for

national or local legal requirements and regu-

lations.

The specifications, design features and illus-

trations in this owner's manual are not binding.

We reserve the right to make modifications

without prior notice.

Volvo Car Corporation

Option All types of option/accessory are marked with

an asterisk .

The range of options/accessories for the dif-

ferent car models varies depending on the mar-

ket. The majority of options are factory fitted

and cannot be retrofitted, accessories are ret-

rofitted.

Contact your authorised Volvo dealer for more

information.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury.

IMPORTANT

Important texts advise of a risk of material damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.

Footnote There is footnote information in the owner's

manual that is located at the bottom of the

page. This information is an addition to the text

that it refers to via a number. If the footnote

refers to text in a table then letters are used

instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts There are displays in the car that show text

messages. These text messages are high-

lighted in the owner's manual by means of the

text being slightly larger and printed in grey.

Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-

sage texts on the information display (e.g.

Audio settings).

Decals The car contains different types of decal which

are designed to convey important information

in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the

car have the following descending degree of

importance for the warning/information.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 8

evastarck

Introduction

Important information

9

Warning for personal injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,

white text/image on black message field. Dan-

gerous situation which, if not avoided, may

result in serious personal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

G 03

15 92

White ISO symbols on black symbol field, white

text/image on black message field. If a colour

is required then the decal shall be blue. Dan-

gerous situation which, if not avoided, may

result in minor or moderate damage to prop-

erty.

Information

G 03

15 93

White ISO symbols and white text/image on

black message field.

Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a

certain sequence are numbered in the owner's

manual.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 9

evastarck

Introduction

Important information

10

When there is a series of illustrations for

step-by-step instructions each step is

numbered in the same way as the corres-

ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adja-

cent to the series of illustrations where the

order of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum-

bered and are used to illustrate a move-

ment.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-

step instructions then the different steps are

numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists Red circles containing a number are used

in overview images where different com-

ponents are pointed out. The number

recurs in the position list featured in con-

nection with the illustration that describes

the item.

Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of

points in the owner's manual.

Example:

Coolant

Engine oil

To be continued This symbol is located furthest down to the

right when a section continues on the next

double-page spread.

Recording data

One or more of the computers in your Volvo are

capable of recording detailed information. This

information is intended for use in research to

enhance safety and for diagnosing faults in

some of the in-car systems. The data may

include details regarding seatbelt use by the

driver and passengers, the functions of various

vehicle systems and modules, and status infor-

mation about the engine, throttle, steering,

brakes and other systems. This data can also

include details of the way the car is driven. This

type of information can include, without being

limited to, specific details such as vehicle

speed, the use of the brake and accelerator

pedals and steering wheel position. This latter

type of data can be stored for a limited period

while the car is being driven and subsequently

during a collision or a near-collision. Volvo Car

Corporation will not disclose the stored infor-

mation without consent. However, Volvo Car

Corporation may be forced to disclose the

information due to national legislation. Volvo

Car Corporation and its authorised workshops

may also read and use the information.

Accessories and extra equipment

The incorrect connection and installation of

accessories can negatively affect the car's

electrical system. Certain accessories only

function when their associated software is

installed in the car's computer system. Always

contact an authorised Volvo workshop before

installing accessories which are connected to

or affect the electrical system.

Information on the Internet

At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-

mation concerning your car.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 10

evastarck

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy

G 00

00 00

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-

ration's core values which influence all opera-

tions. We also believe that our customers share

our consideration for the environment.

Your Volvo complies with strict international

environmental standards and is also manufac-

tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-

efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-

ration has global ISO certification, which

includes the environmental standard ISO

14001 covering all factories and several of our

other units. We also set requirements for our

partners so that they work systematically with

environmental issues.

EPI (Environmental Product Information) is

supplied for all Volvo models. Here you can see

how the environment is affected during the

entire lifecycle of the car.

Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI.

Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption

in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel

consumption generally results in lower emis-

sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-

sumption. For more information read under the

heading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-

cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that

encompasses a clean interior environment as

well as highly efficient emission control. In

many cases the exhaust emissions are well

below the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust

and pollen from entering the passenger com-

partment via the air intake.

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-

rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 11

evastarck

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

12

ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic

outside.

The system consists of an electronic sensor

and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-

tored continuously and if there is an increase

in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as

carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.

Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,

queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone

and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon

filter.

Textile standard The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-

sant and comfortable, even for people with

contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Extreme attention has been given to choosing

environmentally-compatible materials. This

means that they also fulfil the requirements in

the Oeko-Tex 100 standard 1, a major advance

towards a healthier passenger compartment

environment.

Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-

pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the

upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning

with plant substances and fulfils the certifica-

tion requirements.

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions

for a long service life and low fuel consumption

for your car. In this way you contribute to a

cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops

are entrusted with the service and mainte-

nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-

tem. We make clear demands regarding the

way in which our workshops are designed in

order to prevent spills and discharges into the

environment. Our workshop staff have the

knowledge and the tools required to guarantee

good environmental care.

Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental

impact, for example, by driving economically

and by servicing and maintaining the car

according to the instructions in the owner's

manual.

The following additional advice will help you to

do your bit for the environment:

Decrease fuel consumption by choosing ECO tyre pressure, see page 161.

A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption. Remove them directly after use.

Remove unnecessary items from the car. The greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.

If the car is equipped with an engine block heater, always use it before starting from cold. This reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions.

Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.

Drive in the highest gear possible. Low engine speeds result in lower fuel con- sumption.

Use engine braking to slow down.

Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention to local regulations. Switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods.

Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. If uncer- tain about disposal, consult an authorised Volvo workshop for advice.

Service your car regularly.

High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resis- tance. A doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.

These hints will help reduce fuel consumption

without increasing travel time or lessening the

enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to

1 More information on www.oekotex.com

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 12

evastarck

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

13

your car, you'll be saving money - and the

Earth's resources.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 13

evastarck

G 02

08 71

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seatbelts................................................................................................. 16

Airbag system......................................................................................... 18

Airbags (SRS).......................................................................................... 19

Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*............................................... 22

Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................ 24

Inflatable Curtain (IC)............................................................................... 26

WHIPS..................................................................................................... 27

When the systems deploy....................................................................... 29

Child safety............................................................................................. 30

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 14

evastarck

01 SAFETY

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 15

evastarck

01 Safety

Seatbelts01

16

Always use a seatbelt

G 02

01 04

Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi- tioned low down.

Heavy braking can have serious consequences

if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all

passengers use their seatbelts. It is important

that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can

provide maximum protection. Do not lean the

backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed

to protect in a normal seating position.

Putting on a seatbelt Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by

pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud

"click" indicates that the seatbelt has

locked.

Releasing the seatbelt Press the red lock button and then let the

seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not

retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so

that it does not hang loose.

The seatbelt locks and cannot be

withdrawn

if it is pulled out too quickly.

during braking and acceleration.

if the car leans heavily.

Keep in mind the following:

do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly

ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything

the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).

tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts your- self. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop. If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the protective characte- ristics of the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it appears to be undamaged. In addi- tion, replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seat- belt.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 16

evastarck

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

17

Seatbelts and pregnancy

G 02

01 05

The seatbelt should always be worn during

pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the

correct way. The diagonal section should wrap

over the shoulder then be routed between the

breasts and to the side of the abdomen. The

lap section should lay flat over the thighs and

as low as possible under the abdomen. It

must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove

all slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits

close to the body. In addition, check that there

are no twists in the seatbelt.

As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers

should adjust their seats and steering wheel

such that they can easily maintain control of the

vehicle as they drive (which means that they

must be able to easily operate the foot pedals

and steering wheel). They should strive to posi-

tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-

ble between their abdomen and the steering

wheel.

Seatbelt reminder

G 02

70 49

An audio signal and indicator lamp remind a

driver not wearing a seatbelt to use one. The

audio reminder is speed dependent (at low

speeds), and time dependent (when the car is

started). The visual reminder is located in the

roof console and the combined instrument

panel.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 17

evastarck

01 Safety

Airbag system01

18

Seatbelt tensioner

All the seatbelts (except the centre rear seat-

belt) are equipped with seatbelt tensioners. A

mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens

the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent

collision. The seatbelt then provides more

effective restraint for the occupants.

Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel

G 02

72 84

The airbag system 1 is continually monitored by

the system's control module. The warning

symbol in the combined instrument panel illu-

minates when the ignition key is turned to posi-

tion I, II or III. The symbol goes out after

approx. 6 seconds provided the Airbag sys-

tem1 is fault-free.

As well as the warning symbol, a

message may appear on the dis-

play in appropriate cases. If the

warning symbol malfunctions, the

warning triangle illuminates and

the message SRS AIRBAG

SERVICE URGENT appears in

the display. Contact an authorised

Volvo workshop immediately.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol can indicate a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- tem, SIPS, the SRS system or the IC sys- tem. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

1 Includes SRS and seatbelt tensioner, SIPS and IC.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 18

evastarck

01 Safety

Airbags (SRS) 01

19

Airbag (SRS) on the driver's side

G 02

01 08

The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System) in the steering wheel to sup-

plement the protection afforded by the seat-

belt. This airbag is fitted into the centre of the

steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked

SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

Passenger airbag (SRS)

G 02

01 09

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-

tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-

ger side 1. This airbag is folded up into a

compartment above the glovebox. The cover

panel is marked SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated. 2

Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front pas- senger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the life of the child.

SRS system

G 02

01 11

SRS system, left-hand drive.

1 Not all cars have a passenger airbag (SRS). This can be unselected when the car is ordered. 2 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 19

evastarck

01 Safety

Airbags (SRS)01

20

The SRS system consists of airbags and sen-

sors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the

sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot

gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates

when compressed. When this occurs, smoke

escapes into the car. This is completely nor-

mal. The entire process, including inflation and

deflation of the airbag, takes place within

tenths of a second.

WARNING

Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Work on the SRS system can cause mal- function and result in serious personal injury.

G 02

01 10

SRS system, right-hand drive

NOTE

The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver and passen- ger side are used. It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The SRS system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accordingly so that one or more air- bags is deployed. The capacities of the air- bags are also adapted to the collision force to which they are subjected.

NOTE

The airbags have a function whereby their capacities are adapted to the collision force to which the car is subjected.

G 02

73 31

Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive and right-hand drive cars

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 20

evastarck

01 Safety

Airbags (SRS) 01

21

G 03

22 43

Location of decal for front passenger airbag, left- hand drive car.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above the instrument panel where the passenger air- bag is located.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 21

evastarck

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*01

22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Key switch off - PACOS

General information The airbag (SRS) for the front passenger seat

can be deactivated if the car is equipped with

PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For

information on how to activate/deactivate, see

under the heading Activating/deactivating.

Key switch off/switch The switch for the passenger airbag is located

on the passenger end of the instrument panel

and is accessible when the passenger door is

open (see under the following heading, Acti-

vating/deactivating)

Check that the switch is in the required posi-

tion. Volvo recommends that the key blade is

used to change position.

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag (SRS), but does not have PACOS, the airbag will always be activated.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the text message in the rear- view mirror indicates that the airbag (SRS) is deactivated and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed on the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

Activating/deactivating

G 01

96 78

Switch location.

The airbag is activated. With the switch in

this position, persons taller than 140 cm

can sit in the front passenger seat, but

never children in a child seat or on a

booster cushion.

The airbag is deactivated. With the switch

in this position, children in a child seat or

on a booster cushion can sit in the front

passenger seat, but never persons taller

than 140 cm.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 22

evastarck

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)* 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23

WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This also

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

Message

G 02

70 50

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag (SRS) is deactivated.

A text message in the rearview mirror indicates

that the airbag (SRS) for the front passenger

seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 23

evastarck

applies to anyone shorter than 140 cm.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags)01

24

Side airbags SIPS bags

G 02

01 18

Side airbag locations.

In a side impact collision a large proportion of

the collision force is transferred by the SIPS

(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-

lars, the floor, the roof and other structural

parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-

er's and front passenger seats protect the

chest area and are an important part of the

system. The side airbags are located in the

front seat backrests.

WARNING

Side airbags are a supplement the seat- belts. Always use a seatbelt.

WARNING

Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Work on the SIPS bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

WARNING

Use only Volvo genuine car seat covers, or seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

Child seats and side airbags The protection provided by the car to children

seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion

is not diminished by the side airbag.

A child seat or booster cushion can be placed

on the front passenger seat provided that the

car does not have an activated 1 passenger

airbag.

SIPS bags

G 02

53 15

Driver's seat, left-hand drive

The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags

and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips

the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 24

evastarck

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

25

G 02

53 16

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive

The airbag inflates between the occupant and

the door panel and thereby cushions the initial

impact. The airbag deflates when compressed

by the collision. The side airbag is normally only

deployed on the side of the collision.

G 03

22 46

Location of decal for side passenger airbag, driv- er's side, front, left-hand drive car.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 25

evastarck

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC)01

26

Properties

G 02

72 18

The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a

supplement to the SIPS and the airbags. It is

fitted in the headlining along both sides of the

roof and protects all of the vehicle's outer

seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the

sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.

The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the

driver and passengers from striking their heads

on the inside of the car during a collision.

WARNING

Never hang or fasten anything on the roof handles. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended pro- tection. Only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

WARNING

Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the side windows. Other- wise, the intended protection of the inflat- able curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 26

evastarck

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

27

Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS

G 02

03 47

The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-

sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-

cially designed head restraints in the front

seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end

collision, where the angle and speed of the col-

lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all

have an influence.

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front

seat backrests are lowered backward to alter

the seating position of the driver and front seat

passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash

injury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS system and child seats/booster

cushions The protection provided by the car to children

seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion

is not diminished by the WHIPS system.

Correct seating position For the best possible protection, the driver and

front seat passenger should sit in the centre of

the seat with as little space as possible

between the head and the head restraint.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 27

evastarck

01 Safety

WHIPS01

28

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system

G 02

01 25

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

G 02

01 26

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seat appears to be undamaged.

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear-end collision.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 28

evastarck

01 Safety

When the systems deploy 01

29

System Triggered

Seatbelt tensioner In a frontal collision

Airbags SRS In a frontal collision A

Side airbags SIPS In a side-impact accidentA

Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact accidentA

Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have deployed, the following is

recommended:

Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.

Have an authorised Volvo workshop replace components in the car's safety system.

Always contact a doctor.

NOTE

The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- tems are deployed only once during a colli- sion

WARNING

The airbag control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 29

evastarck

01 Safety

Child safety01

30

Children should sit comfortably and safely

The position of a child in the car and the choice

of equipment are dictated by the child's weight

and size. For more information, see

page 31.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit

correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child

to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo's own child safety equipment is

designed for your car. Use Volvo genuine

equipment to best ensure that the mounting

points and attachments are correctly posi-

tioned and are sufficiently strong.

NOTE

If problems arise when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Child seats

G 02

01 28

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

Volvo has child safety products that are

designed for and tested by Volvo.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included with the product.

Do not attach the straps for the child seat to

the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or

beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-

age the straps. Allow the back of the child seat

to rest against the dashboard. This applies to

cars without a passenger airbag, or where the

airbag is deactivated.

Location of child seats You may place:

a child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat, provided the passenger

airbag is not activated 1.

a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat that uses the back of the front seat as support.

Always place a child in the rear seat if the pas-

senger airbag is activated. A child in the front

passenger seat could suffer serious injury if the

airbag deploys.

WARNING

Never place the child seat in the front seat if the car is equipped with an activated 2

front passenger airbag. If problems arise when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22 2

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 30

evastarck

see page 22For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS),

01 Safety

Child safety 01

31

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

Label Airbag

Label located on instrument panel end face.

Recommended child seats 3

Weight/age Front seat A Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

<10 kg

(0 9 months)

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car's seatbelt

and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and

support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt, straps

and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing

child seat with ISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E1 03301146

Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing child

seat with ISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E1 03301146

Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 03301146

3 For other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 31

evastarck

01 Safety

Child safety01

32

Weight/age Front seat A Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9 18 kg

(9 36 months)

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car's seatbelt

and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and

support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt, straps

and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat,

secured with the ISOFIX fixture sys-

tem and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat,

secured with the ISOFIX fixture system

and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

Group 2/3

15 36 kg

(3 12 yr)

Volvo Booster cushion with or with-

out backrest.

Type approval: E5 03139

Volvo Booster cushion with or without

backrest.

Type approval: E5 03139

Volvo Booster cushion with or without

backrest.

Type approval: E5 03139

Volvo Integrated booster cushion

available as an option.

Type approval: E5 03140

A For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 32

evastarck

01 Safety

Child safety 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 33

Integrated booster cushions*

G 02

72 11

Volvo's integrated booster cushion for the cen-

tre rear seat is specially designed to provide

optimum safety for children. Combined with

the regular seatbelts the integrated booster

cushion is approved for children weighing

between 15 and 36 kg.

Folding out the booster cushion

G 02

72 09

1. Fold down the booster cushion

2. Pull apart the Velcro

3. Raise the upper portion back into place

Check that:

the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted, and that the seatbelt is positioned correctly across the shoulder.

the lap belt is low over the pelvis for opti- mum protection.

the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder.

Carefully adjust the position of the head restraint to suit the child.

WARNING

Repair or replacement should only be per- formed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion.

If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in con- junction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protec- tion. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.

Folding in the booster cushion

G 02

72 10

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 33

evastarck

01 Safety

Child safety01

34 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fold down the upper section.

Secure the Velcro strap.

Raise the booster cushion into the rear seat

backrest.

NOTE

Make sure that both sections of the booster cushion are secured with the Velcro strap (B) before folding down. Otherwise the upper section (A) could become trapped in the rear seat backrest (C) when the booster cushion is folded out again.

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats*

G 01

52 68

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system

are concealed behind the lower section of the

rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indicated

by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see

illustration above).

Press the seat cushion down to access the

mounting points.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation

instructions when connecting a child seat to

the ISOFIX mounting points.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 34

evastarck

01 Safety

01

35

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 35

evastarck

G 02

09 01

36 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Overview, left-hand drive car.................................................................. 38

Overview, right-hand drive car................................................................ 40

Combined instrument panel.................................................................... 42

Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 44

Information display.................................................................................. 47

Switches in the centre console............................................................... 48

Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 51

Left-hand stalk switch............................................................................. 53

Trip computer*........................................................................................ 54

Right-hand stalk switch.......................................................................... 56

Cruise control*........................................................................................ 58

Steering wheel adjustment, parking brake............................................. 60

Electrical socket, cigarette lighter........................................................... 61

Power windows....................................................................................... 62

Rearview and door mirrors...................................................................... 64

Power sunroof*........................................................................................ 69

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 36

evastarck

02 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 37

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive car

02

38

HU-403

DOLBY B NR

COMFORT ADVANCEDSPORT

G 02

72 20

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 38

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive car

02

39

G 02

95 81

Driver's door control panel.

Fog lamps

Headlamps, position/parking lights

Rear fog lamp

Direction indicators, beam selection

Cruise control

Horn

Combined instrument panel

Keypad for phone/audio

Windscreen wipers

Parking brake

Switch panel

Climate control

Audio system

Electric socket, Cigarette lighter

Hazard warning flashers

Glovebox

Panel vents

Display

Temperature gauge

Odometer, trip meter/cruise control

Speedometer

Direction indicators

Tachometer

Outside temperature, clock, gear position

Fuel gauge

Indicator and warning symbols

Panel vents

Instrument lighting

Headlamp levelling

Lighting panel

Reading lamps

Interior lighting

Control, sunroof

Seatbelt reminder

Rearview mirror

Lock button, for all doors

Blocking power windows in the rear doors

Controls, power windows

Controls, power door mirrors

Active chassis FOUR-C

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 39

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, right-hand drive car

02

40

G 02

72 21

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 40

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, right-hand drive car

02

41

G 02

95 81

Driver's door control panel.

Rear fog lamp

Headlamps, position/parking lights

Fog lamps

Windscreen wipers

Keypad for phone/audio

Horn

Combined instrument panel

Cruise control

Direction indicators, beam selection

Parking brake

Electric socket, Cigarette lighter

Climate control

Audio system

Switch panel

Hazard warning flashers

Glovebox

Panel vents

Indicator and warning symbols

Fuel gauge

Outside temperature, clock, gear position

Tachometer

Direction indicators

Speedometer

Odometer, trip meter/cruise control

Temperature gauge

Display

Panel vents

Lighting panel

Headlamp levelling

Instrument lighting

Reading lamps

Interior lighting

Control, sunroof

Seatbelt reminder

Rearview mirror

Lock button, for all doors

Blocking power windows in the rear doors

Controls, power windows

Controls, power door mirrors

Active chassis FOUR-C

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 41

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument panel

02

42

G 02

69 73

Temperature gauge Displays the tem-

perature of the engine cooling system. A

message will appear on the display if the

temperature becomes too high and the

gauge goes into the red zone. Bear in mind

that extra lights placed in front of the air

intake, reduce the cooling capacity at high

outside temperatures and high engine

loads.

Display The display shows information

and warning messages.

Speedometer Shows the speed of the

car.

Trip meters T1 and T2 The trip meters are

used for measuring short distances. The

right-hand digit displays tenths of a kilo-

metre. Press the button for more than

2 seconds to reset. Switch between trip

meters with one quick press of the button.

Cruise control indicator - For more infor-

mation see page 58.

Odometer The odometer indicates the

total distance the car has travelled.

Main beam indicator

Warning symbol If a fault arises, the sym-

bol illuminates and a message is shown in

the display.

Tachometer Indicates engine speed in

thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Do not allow the tachometer gauge to enter

the red zone.

Automatic gearbox indicator The

selected gear position is displayed here.

Geartronic automatic gearbox and drive

using the manual function, the current

manual gear is displayed.

Outside temperature gauge - Displays the

outside temperature When the tempera-

flake symbol illuminates in the display. This

symbol serves as a warning for slippery

road surfaces. The outside temperature

gauge may show a slightly high reading

after the car are or has been stationary.

Clock - Turn the button to set the clock.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 42

evastarck

ture lies between +2 C to 5 C, a snow-

02 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument panel

02

43

When the lamp in the instrument illumi-

nates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel

as soon as possible. See also Trip com-

puter page 54.

Indicator and warning symbols

Direction indicators left/right

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 43

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

44

Functionality check, symbols

All indicator and warning symbols 1 illuminate

when the ignition key is turned to position II

before starting. This is to check that the sym-

bols are working. When the engine starts, all

the symbols should go out except the hand-

brake symbol, which only goes out when the

brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start within

5 seconds, all symbols extinguish

except the symbols for a fault in

the car's emissions system and for

low oil pressure. Certain symbols

may have no function, depending

on the car's specifications.

Warning symbols in the centre of the instrument panel

G 02

69 77

These symbols illuminate with a

red or amber glow depending on

the severity of the fault.

Red symbol: 1. Stop the car in a safe place. Do not drive

2. Read the information on the display.

3. Rectify the fault as instructed or contact an

authorised Volvo workshop.

Symbol and message text are visible until the

fault has been rectified.

Yellow symbol: 1. Read the message on the display.

2. Action.

The message text is cleared using the READ

button, see page 47, or it disappears auto-

matically after 2 minutes.

When the message text TIME FOR REGULAR

SERVICE is shown, the symbol and message

text are cleared using the READ button, or dis-

appear automatically after 2 minutes.

Indicator symbols

ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the

system is not working. The car's

regular brake system continues to

work, but without the ABS func-

tion.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the warning symbol remains illuminated,

drive to an authorised Volvo workshop to

have the ABS system checked.

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 189.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 44

evastarck

the car further.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

45

Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake

fluid level may be too low.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and check the

level in the brake fluid reservoir, see

page 192.

2. If the reservoir level is below MIN, the car

should not be driven further. Have it towed

to an authorised Volvo workshop to have

the brake system checked.

If the warning symbols for BRAKE

and ABS illuminate at the same

time, there may be a fault in the

brake force distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine.

2. Restart the engine.

If both symbols go out, it was an indicator error.

If the warning symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 192.

If the level in the reservoir is below MIN then the car should not be driven any fur- ther. Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.

If the brake fluid level is normal and the symbols remain illuminated, drive the car carefully to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.

WARNING

If the warning symbols for BRAKE and ABS illuminate at the same time, there is a risk that the rear of the car will have a tendency to slide during heavy braking.

Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates until the

driver buckles up.

Low oil pressure 2

If this symbol illuminates during

driving then the engine's oil pres-

sure is too low. Stop the engine

immediately and check the engine

oil level. If the symbol illuminates

and the oil level is normal, contact an author-

ised Volvo workshop.

Emissions system If the symbol illuminates then it

may be due to a fault in the car's

emissions system. Drive to an

authorised Volvo workshop to

have the system checked.

Fault in SRS If this symbol remains illuminated

or illuminates while driving, it

means a fault has been detected in

the SRS system (airbags). Drive to

an authorised Volvo workshop to

have the system checked.

Alternator not charging If this symbol illuminates while

driving, there is probably a fault in

the electrical system. Contact an

authorised Volvo workshop.

2 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 189.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 45

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

46

Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol indicates engine pre-

heating. You can start the car

when the symbol switches off.

Applies to diesel cars only.

Parking brake applied The symbol illuminates when the

parking brake is applied. Always

pull the parking brake lever to the

end position.

NOTE

The symbol illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.

Rear fog lamp This symbol is illuminated when

the fog lamp is on.

Trailer indicator lamp Flashes when the direction indica-

tors of the car and trailer are used.

If the symbol does not flash, one of

the direction indicator lamps on

the trailer or car is defective.

Stability systems STC/DSTC The system's different functions

and symbols are described on

page 127.

Reminder doors not closed

If one of the doors or the tailgate is not properly

closed the driver will be reminded of this.

Low speed If the car moves at a speed less than

about 7 km/h then the information symbol illu-

minates and DRIVER DOOR OPEN,

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN, LEFT REAR

DOOR OPEN or RIGHT REAR DOOR

OPEN is shown in the display at the same time.

Stop the car safely as soon as possible and

close the door or bonnet.

High speed If the car is moving faster than

about 7 km/h then the symbol illu-

minates and one of the texts indi-

cated in the previous paragraph

appears in the display at the same

time.

Boot lid reminder If the boot lid is open, BOOT LID OPEN will

appear on the display.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 46

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Information display

02

47

Messages in the display

G 02

69 79

A message appears in the display whenever a

warning or indicator symbol illuminates. Once

you have read and understood the message,

press the READ button (A). Read messages

are then erased from the display and stored in

a memory. Messages regarding faults remain

in the memory until the fault has been rem-

edied.

Very serious fault messages cannot be erased

from the display. They remain in the display

until the fault is remedied.

Messages stored in the memory can be read

again. Press the READ button (A) to see stored

messages. Scroll through the messages stored

in the memory by pressing the READ button.

Press the READ button to return read mes-

sages to the memory.

NOTE

If a warning message interrupts when you are in the trip computer menu or wish to use the phone, you must first acknowledge the

ton (A).

Message Specification

STOP SAFELY Stop the car in a safe

manner and turn off

the engine. Serious

risk of damage.

STOP ENGINE Stop the car in a safe

manner and turn off

the engine. Serious

risk of damage.

SERVICE URGENT Have the car

checked by an

authorised Volvo

workshop immedi-

ately.

SEE MANUAL Read the owner's

manual.

Message Specification

SERVICE

REQUIRED

Have the car

checked by an

authorised Volvo

workshop as soon

as possible.

FIX NEXT SERV-

ICE

Have your car

checked at the next

service interval.

TIME FOR REGU-

LAR SERVICE

Time for regular

service at an author-

ised Volvo work-

shop. The timing is

determined by the

number of kilome-

tres driven, number

of months since the

last service and

engine running time.

SOOT FILTER

FULL SEE MAN-

UAL

Diesel particle filter

requires regenera-

tion, see page 117.

STC/DSTC SPIN

CONTROL OFF

The function of the

stability and traction

control system is

reduced, see

page 127 for more

variants.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 47

evastarck

message. Do this by pressing the READ but-

02 Instruments and controls

Switches in the centre console

02

48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Switch

G 02

71 94

NOTE

The order of the buttons may vary.

Active chassis FOUR-C* Press the button to select the

Comfort or Sport chassis set-

ting, see page 129. The display

shows the current setting for

10 seconds.

BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)* Press the button to deactivate

or reactivate the function. For

further information, see

page 152.

DSTC system This button is used to reduce or

reactivate the functions of the

DSTC system.

When the lamp in the button is illuminated, the

DSTC system is activated (assuming there is

no fault).

Hold the button depressed for at least half a

second to reduce the function of the DSTC

system. The lamp in the button goes out and

the text DSTC ANTI-SKID OFF is shown in the

display.

The DSTC system is reactivated when the

engine is restarted. For more information, see

page 127.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 48

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Switches in the centre console

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49

WARNING

Keep in mind that car's driving characteris- tics may change if you deactivate the DSTC system.

Electric socket/Cigarette lighter* The electrical socket can be

used for 12 V accessories, such

as mobile phone chargers and

coolers.

The ignition key must be at least

in position I so that the socket

can supply power.

The cigarette lighter is activated by pushing in

the button. The button pops out when the

lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cig-

arette on the heated coils. For safety reasons,

always keep the cover in place when the

socket is not in use. Maximum current tap 10 A.

Lowering the outer head restraints in the

rear seat* Do not lower the head restraints

if there is a passenger in one of

the outer seats.

1. Turn the ignition key to position I or II.

2. Press the button to tilt the rear head

restraints forward for a better rear view.

The head restraints are moved back manually.

The head restraints must be in their upright

positions if the rear backrests are to be folded

down.

Retractable power door mirrors* This button is used to fold in the

door mirrors if they are folded

out or to fold them out if they

are folded in.

Proceed as follows if a door mirror has been

accidentally folded in or out:

1. Manually fold the door mirror forward as far

as possible.

2. Turn the ignition key to position II.

3. Fold the door mirror inward and then out-

ward using the button.

The door mirrors have now returned to their

original fixed positions.

Park Assist* The system is always activated

when the car is started. Press

the button to deactivate/reacti-

vate the parking assistance

system, see page 130.

Locking the boot lid* Press this button in order to

lock the boot lid. The boot lid

remains locked even if the

doors are unlocked manually

with the master key, the master

key remote control or the serv-

ice key.

Deactivation of the deadlocks and

detectors* Use this button when you wish

to switch off the deadlocks

function (the deadlocks func-

tion means that doors cannot

be opened from the inside

when locked). This button can

also be used when deactivating the alarm sys-

tem's movement and tilt detectors* - e.g. when

transporting the car by ferry. The lamp illumi-

nates when these systems are shut down/

deactivated, see page 106 and 109.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 49

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Switches in the centre console

02

50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Auxiliary lamps* Use this button to switch the

auxiliary lamps on with main

beam or to switch them off. The

lamp in the button illuminates

when the function is activated

Active Bi-Xenon lights, ABL* The ABL headlamps' headlamp

pattern follows the movements

of the steering wheel during

driving. The function is acti-

vated automatically when the

car is started and can be deac-

tivated/activated by pressing the button. The

lamp in the button illuminates when the func-

tion is activated

Shifting headlamp pattern for right/left-

hand traffic Hold the button depressed for at least five sec-

onds. The car must be stationary when the

headlamp pattern is shifted.

The message DIPPED BEAM SETT. F.

RIGHT TRAFFIC or DIPPED BEAM SETT. F.

LEFT TRAFFIC is shown in the display. For

more information and adapting headlamp pat-

tern for halogen or Bi-Xenon headlamps, see

page 145.

Hazard warning flashers

G 02

72 79

Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction

indicators flash) when the car is stopped where

it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press

the button to activate the function.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the use of hazard warning flashers vary from country to coun- try.

Door mirror and rear window defrosters Heating is used to quickly

remove misting and ice from

the rear window and door mir-

rors.

Press the switch to start

defrosting the rear window and

door mirrors. The lamp in the

switch illuminates. The light in

the switch is lit

Defrosting is automatically dis-

connected after about

12 minutes.

Heated front seats For further information see

page 76 or 79.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 50

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51

Headlamps

G 02

71 00

Light switches

Fog lamps*

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

Rear fog lamp

Thumbwheel for adjusting instrument light-

ing

Posi- tion

Specification

Automatic/deactivated dipped

beam. Only main beam flash.

Position/parking lamps

Automatic dipped beam. Main

beam and main beam flash

work in this position.

Automatic dipped beam* Dipped beam comes on automatically when

the ignition key is turned to position II, except

when the headlamp control (1) is in the centre

position. If necessary, the automatic dipped

beam can be deactivated by an authorised

Volvo workshop.

Automatic dipped beam, main beam 1. Turn the ignition key to position II.

2. Dipped beam is activated by means of

turning the headlamp control (1) clockwise

to the end position.

3. Main beam is activated by means of mov-

ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the

steering wheel to the end position and

releasing it, see page 53.

The lamps are switched off automatically when

the ignition key is turned to position I or 0.

Position/parking lamps

Position/parking lamps can be switched on

irrespective of ignition key position.

Turn the headlamp control (1) to the centre

position.

When the ignition key is in position II the posi-

tion/parking lamps and number plate lighting

are always on.

Headlamp levelling

The load in the car changes the vertical align-

ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-

zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting

the height of the beam.

1. Turn the ignition key to position II.

2. Turn the headlamp control (1) to one of the

end positions.

3. Roll the thumbwheel (3) up or down

respectively to raise or lower beam align-

ment.

Cars with Active Bi-Xenon and Bi-Xenon

headlamps* have automatic headlamp level-

ling, so there is no thumbwheel (3).

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 51

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

02

52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Instrument lighting

The instrument lighting is switched on when

the ignition key is in position II and the head-

lamp control (1) is in one of the end positions.

The lighting is automatically dimmed during the

day and can be controlled manually at night.

Roll the thumbwheel (5) up or down for

brighter or dimmer lighting.

Fog lamp

NOTE

Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from country to country.

Fog lamps* The front fog lamps can be switched on along

with the headlamps or the position lamps/park-

ing lamps.

Press the button (2), see page 51.

The light in the button illuminates when the

front fog lamps are switched on.

Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp can only be switched on with

the headlamps or the front fog lamps.

Press the button (4), see page 51.

The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com-

bined instrument panel and the light in the

button illuminate when the rear fog lamp is

switched on.

Active Bi-Xenon lights, ABL*

G 02

07 89

The ABL headlamps' headlamp pattern follows

the movements of the steering wheel during

driving. The function is activated automatically

when the car is started and can be deactivated/

activated using the button in the centre con-

sole, see page 50.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 52

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

02

53

Stalk switch positions

G 02

71 78

Short flash sequence, direction indicators

Continuous flash sequence, direction indi-

cators

Main beam flash

Home safe lighting and switching of

dipped and main beam

Direction indicators

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to end

position (2).

The stalk switch remains in its end position and

is moved back manually, or automatically by

steering wheel movement.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to posi-

tion (1) and release, the stalk switch then

returns to its home position, or move the

stalk switch to position (2) and move it

directly back to the home position.

The direction indicators flash three times.

Short flash sequence interrupted immediately

if indicating is started in the opposite direction.

Switching, main and dipped beam

The ignition key must be in position II for main

beam to be switched on.

1. Turn the headlamp control clockwise to the

end position, see page 51.

2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering

wheel to the end position (4) and release.

Main beam flash

Move the stalk switch gently towards the

steering wheel to position (3).

Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is

released.

Home safe lighting

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept

switched on to work as home safe lighting after

the car has been locked. The standard delay is

30 seconds 1, but can be changed to 60 or

90 seconds.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering

wheel to the end position (4) and release.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

1 Factory settings.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 53

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Trip computer*

02

54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information

G 02

69 56

READ - confirms

Thumbwheel - browse between menus

and options in the trip computer list

RESET - resets

Controls To scroll through trip computer information

turn the thumbwheel (B) either up or down in

steps. Continue turning to return to the starting

point.

NOTE

If a warning message interrupts while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by pressing the READ button and revert to the trip computer function.

Functions

The trip computer displays the following infor-

mation:

AVERAGE SPEED

SPEED IN MILES PER HOUR*

INSTANTANEOUS

AVERAGE

KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK

STC/DSTC, see page 127

Average speed The average speed since the last reset

(RESET). When the ignition is switched off, the

average speed is stored and used as the basis

of the new value when you continue driving.

This can be reset with the RESET button on the

stalk switch.

Speed in miles per hour* Current speed is displayed in mph if the speed-

ometer is graduated in km/h. If it is graduated

in mph then the current speed is shown in mph.

Instantaneous Continuous information on current fuel con-

sumption. Fuel consumption is calculated each

second. The figure in the display is updated

every couple of seconds. When the car is sta-

tionary, " ----" appears on the display. During

the period for regeneration 1 fuel consumption

may increase, see page 117.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater is used.

Average The average fuel consumption since the last

reset. Reset using RESET.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven parking heater* has been used.

1 Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 54

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Trip computer*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55

Kilometres to empty tank The calculation is based on the average fuel

consumption over the last 30 km and the

remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display

shows the approximate distance that can be

driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the

tank. No guaranteed range remains when the

display shows " --- kilometres to empty

tank". Refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven parking heater* has been used or if driving style has been changed.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 55

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

02

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Windscreen wipers

G 02

69 53

Wiper/washer function windscreen.

Thumbwheel

Rain sensor - on/off

Windscreen wipers off The windscreen wipers are off

when the stalk switch is in position

0.

Single sweep Raise the stalk switch to make a

single sweep.

Intermittent wiping You can set a suitable delay

between the sweeps. Turn the

thumbwheel up for a shorter inter-

val between sweeps. Turn it down

to increase the delay.

Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal

speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically activates the

windscreen wipers based on how much water

it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of

the rain sensor is adjusted using the thumb-

wheel.

Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen-

sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity. (An

extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is

turned upwards.)

On/Off When activating the rain sensor, the ignition

key must be in position I or II and the wind-

screen wiper stalk switch must be in position

0 (not activated).

Activating the rain sensor:

Press the button. A lamp in the button illu-

minates to indicate that the rain sensor is

active.

To turn the rain sensor off, either:

Press the button. The lamp in the button goes out.

Press the stalk switch downward to another wiper program. If the stalk switch is raised, the rain sensor will remain active, the wipers make an extra sweep and then return to rain sensor mode when the stalk is released to position 0.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 56

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated

when the key is removed from the ignition

switch or 5 minutes after the ignition is

switched off.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac- tivate the rain sensor by pressing button (2) while the ignition key is in position I or II.

Windscreen washer

Pull the stalk switch towards the steering wheel

to start the windscreen washers. The wipers

will make several more sweeps once the stalk

switch is released.

Headlamp washer*

Use of the windscreen washer automatically

activates the headlamp washer.

High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a

large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the

headlamps are only washed every fifth wash

cycle (within a 10 minute period). When ten

minutes have elapsed following the latest

windscreen washing, the headlamps are again

washed with high-pressure with the first wind-

screen washing. Turn the stalk switch toward

the steering wheel to wash the windscreen

only.

Reduced washing

When only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid

remains in the reservoir, the supply to the

headlamps is cut off. This is in order to priori-

tise visibility through the windscreen.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 57

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

02

58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Activating

G 02

71 77

The controls for cruise control are to the left of

the steering wheel.

Setting the desired speed:

1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is

shown on the combined instrument panel.

2. Touch + or - to lock the vehicle speed.

CRUISE-ON appears in the combined

instrument panel.

Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds

below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h..

Increasing or decreasing speed

G 02

69 49

Increase or decrease the speed by press-

ing and holding + or -. The speed of the car

when the button is released is set as the

new speed.

A brief press (less than half a second) on + or

- changes the speed by 1 km/h.

NOTE

A temporary increase in speed (less than one minute) using the accelerator, such as while overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting. When you release the accel- erator, the car will return to the programmed speed.

Temporary disengagement

Press 0 to disengage the cruise control tem-

porarily. CRUISE will be shown on the com-

bined instrument panel. The speed set earlier

is stored in the memory.

The cruise control is also temporarily disen-

gaged when:

the brake pedal or clutch pedal is depressed

speed falls when travelling uphill to below

25-30 km/h 1

the gear selector is moved to position N

wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs

a temporary increase in speed lasts longer than 1 minute

1 Depending on engine type.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 58

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59

Return to the set speed Press this button to resume the

previously set speed. CRUISE

ON appears on the combined

instrument panel.

Disengaging

Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise control.

CRUISE ON clears on the combined instru-

ment panel.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 59

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Steering wheel adjustment, parking brake

02

60

Steering wheel adjustment

G 02

73 08

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both

height and reach.

1. Press down the control on the left-hand

side of the steering column.

2. Then adjust the steering wheel to the posi-

tion that suits you best.

3. Press the control back into place to lock

the steering wheel. If this is difficult, press

the steering wheel slightly while pressing

the control back.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel before driving off, never while driving. Check that the steering wheel is fixed in position.

Parking brake (handbrake)

G 02

73 07

The lever is located between the front seats.

NOTE

The warning lamp symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.

How to apply the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake down firmly.

2. Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly to

its full extent.

3. Release the foot brake and make sure that

the car is stationary.

4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake lever

must be pulled more firmly.

5. When parking a vehicle always put the gear

selector in position 1 (for manual transmis-

sion) or P (for automatic transmission).

Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels

away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the

wheels towards the kerb.

How to release the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake down firmly.

2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,

press the button, release the parking brake

lever and release the button.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 60

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Electrical socket, cigarette lighter

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61

Electrical socket in the rear seat

G 02

71 73

The electrical socket can be used for various

accessories, such as mobile phone chargers

and coolers. It is designed for 12 V. The maxi-

mum current is 10 A.

The ignition key must be at least in position I

so that the socket can supply power.

WARNING

For reasons of safety, always keep the cover in place when the socket is not in use.

Cigarette lighter* Press in the lighter to activate it.

The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull

out the lighter and light a cigarette on the

heated coils.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 61

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

02

62

Operating

The power windows are operated using the

controls in the doors. The ignition key must be

in position I or II for the power windows to

operate. The windows continue to work when

the car has stopped and ignition key has been

removed, provided none of the doors is

opened. Operate the windows with caution.

To open a window:

Depress the front of the control.

To close a window:

Raise the front of the control.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

WARNING

Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows. Pay close attention if the rear door windows are controlled from the driver's door or if the windows are closed with the remote control.

Driver's door

G 02

95 82

Controls, power windows.

Front window controls

Rear window controls

The driver can operate all power windows from

the driver's seat. The windows can be opened

and closed in two ways:

Manual operation Depress one of the controls (A) or (B) gen-

tly, or raise them gently. The power win-

dows go up or down as long as the switch

is actuated.

Automatic operation Fully depress one of the controls (A) or (B)

or raise it, then release. The side window

will then open or close automatically. If the

window is obstructed by an object, the

movement will stop.

WARNING

The function that interrupts the movement of the windows in the event of blocking works only with automatic closing, not with manual.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the ignition key if the driver leaves the car.

Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 62

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

02

63

Blocking power windows in the rear doors

G 02

95 83

Blocking rear power windows and electric child safety locks*.

The rear power windows can be blocked using

the switch on the driver's door control panel.

The light in the switch is illuminated The rear door windows can only be operated

from the driver's door.

The light in the switch is extinguished The rear door windows can be operated both

with the controls on each rear door and with

the controls on the driver's door.

Front passenger seat

G 02

95 85

The control in the front passenger door oper-

ates that window only.

Rear power windows

G 02

95 86

The rear door windows can be operated with

the control on each rear door or with the switch

on the driver's door.

If the light in the switch for blocking the rear

power windows (located in the control panel in

the driver's door) is lit, the rear door windows

can only be operated from the driver's door.

The windows in the rear doors are operated in

the same way as the windows in the front

doors.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 63

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Rearview and door mirrors

02

64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Interior rearview mirror

G 02

66 60

Dimming Normal position

Dimmed position

Bright light from behind could be reflected in

the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use

dimming when disturbed by light from behind.

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically

dimmed by the rearview mirror.

NOTE

The control is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.

Interior rearview mirror with compass*

G 02

69 65

The upper left-hand corner of the rearview mir-

ror has an integrated display that shows the

compass direction in which the front of the car

is pointing.

Eight different directions are shown with Eng-

lish abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east),

E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south

west), W (west) and NW (north west).

If the compass is activated then it starts auto-

matically in ignition position II or when the

engine is running.

Switch the compass on or off by pressing the

button set into the rear of the mirror. Use a

straightened paper clip for example. The but-

ton is countersunk approximately 2.5 cm in the

mirror.

Set the correct zone for the compass

C A L

Z O N E

C A L

Z O N E

G 02

69 50

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The correct zone must be selected for the com-

pass to work correctly.

1. Ignition position II.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 64

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Rearview and door mirrors

02

65

2. Press and hold the button on the rear of the

mirror for approximately 3 seconds until

ZONE is shown (use a straightened paper

clip for example). The number for the cur-

rent area is shown.

3. Press the button several times until the

number for the required geographic area

(115) is shown. After several seconds the

display returns to show the compass direc-

tion, this means that the change of zone is

complete.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 65

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Rearview and door mirrors

02

66

G 02

66 77

Magnetic zones for the compass.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 66

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Rearview and door mirrors

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67

Calibration The compass may need calibrating to work

correctly. For best results, switch off all major

power consumers such as interior lighting,

ventilation fan, heated rear window etc. and

avoid having metal objects and magnetic

objects close to the mirror.

1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the

engine running.

2. Press and hold the button on the rear of the

rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar)

until CAL is shown again (approx. 6 sec-

onds).

3. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no

more than 8 km/h until CAL disappears

from the display. Which is when calibration

is complete.

Alternative calibration method Drive off as usual. CAL disappears from the

display when calibration is complete.

Door mirrors

G 02

95 87

The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors

are at the front of the driver's door armrest.

1. Press the L button for the left-hand door

mirror or the R button for the right-hand

door mirror. The light on the button illumi-

nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the

centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light

goes out.

WARNING

Adjust the mirrors before you begin driving.

Door mirrors with memory function* If the car has door mirrors with memory func-

tion, they work together with the memory set-

ting of the seat, see page 89.

WARNING

The driver-side door mirror is wide angled to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.

Folding in the door mirrors, see page 49.

Memory function in remote control* When you unlock the car with one of the remote

controls and change the setting of the door

mirrors, these new settings are saved in the

remote control. The next time you unlock the

car with the same remote control and open the

driver's door within five minutes, the mirrors

will assume their stored positions.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 67

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Rearview and door mirrors

02

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Laminated side windows*

The laminated windows in the front and rear

doors improve sound insulation in the passen-

ger compartment and provide better protec-

tion against unauthorised entry.

Water and dirt-repellent coating*

The front windows and/or door mirrors are

treated with a coating that ensures that the

view through the windows or in the mirrors is

good even if it is raining.

Side windows and mirrors treated with

the water and dirt-repellent coating are

marked with a small symbol. For information on

glass care, see page 177.

Rearview and door mirrors In certain weather conditions, the function of

the dirt-repellent coating is improved if the

door mirror defrosters are used, see

page 76 or 78.

Defrost the door mirrors:

if they are covered with ice or snow

in heavy rain and dirty road conditions

if they are misted.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a scraper to remove ice from the mirrors as this could scratch the glass and the water and dirt-repellent coating could be damaged.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 68

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Power sunroof*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69

Open positions

G 02

73 25

The sunroof controls are located in the roof

panel. The sunroof can be opened in two posi-

tions:

Ventilation position, up at the rear edge.

Sliding/comfort position 1, backwards/for-

wards.

The ignition key must be in position I or II.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Switch off the supply to the power sunroof by removing the ignition key if the driver leaves the car.

G 02

70 10

Closing, automatic

Closing, manual

Opening, manual

Opening, automatic

Opening, ventilation position

Closing, ventilation position

Ventilation position To open:

Press the rear edge of the control (5)

upward.

To close:

Pull the rear edge of the control (6) down-

ward.

Switch from ventilation position to comfort

position; pull the control rearwards to its end

position (4) and release.

Sliding position

Automatic operation Pull the control past the point of resistance

(3) to the rear end position (4) or past the

point of resistance (2) to the forward end

position (1) and release. The sunroof

opens/closes completely.

In order to open from comfort position to maxi-

mum opening:

Pull the control to the rear once more to the

end position (4) and release.

1 In comfort position, the sunroof is not completely open in order to reduce the level of wind noise.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 69

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

Power sunroof*

02

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Manual operation To open:

Pull the control rearward to the point of

resistance (3). The sunroof moves toward

the fully open position as long as the button

is held in this position.

To close:

Press the control forward to the point of

resistance (2). The sunroof moves toward

the closed position as long as the button is

held in this position.

WARNING

The sunroof's pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing, not manual.

Sunscreen

G 02

01 57

The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior

sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-

matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the

handle and slide the screen forward to close it.

Pinch protection

The sunroof's pinch protection function is acti-

vated if the hatch is blocked by an object. If

blocked, the sunroof will stop and automati-

cally open to the previous position.

WARNING

The sunroof's pinch protection function only operates during automatic closing, not dur- ing manual closing.

Make sure children's hands are clear when closing the sunroof.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 70

evastarck

02 Instruments and controls

02

71

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 71

evastarck

G 02

09 06

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on climate control................................................... 74

Manual climate control, AC..................................................................... 76

Electronic climate control, ECC*............................................................. 78

Air distribution......................................................................................... 81

Fuel-driven parking heater*..................................................................... 82

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 72

evastarck

03 CLIMATE CONTROL

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 73

evastarck

03 Climate control

General information on climate control

03

74

Air conditioning

The climate control system cools or heats as

well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger

compartment. The car is equipped with either

manual (AC) or electronic climate control

(ECC).

NOTE

The air conditioning can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible air in the pas- senger compartment and prevent the win- dows from misting, it should always be on.

Misting windows

Reduce the problem of windows misting up on

the inside by cleaning the windows. Use a reg-

ular window cleaner.

Particle filter

Make sure that the multifilter/particle filter is

replaced regularly. Consult an authorised

Volvo workshop.

Ice and snow

Remove ice and snow from the climate control

air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the

windscreen).

Fault tracing and repair

Entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate

control system to an authorised Volvo work-

shop only.

Refrigerant

The climate control system contains R134a

refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-

rine, which means that it is harmless to the

ozone layer. The system must only be charged

with R134a refrigerant. Have an authorised

Volvo workshop carry out this work.

Cars with ECC

Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the

physical experience with reference to air

speed, humidity, exposure to sun, etc. which

affect the interior and exterior of the car.

Sensors The sun sensor is on the upper portion of the

instrument panel. Remember not to cover it. Do

not cover the passenger compartment tem-

perature sensor on the climate control panel.

Side windows and sunroof To ensure that the air conditioning works sat-

isfactorily, the side windows, and sunroof if

appropriate, should be closed. Also, make sure

the air ducts in the parcel shelf are not blocked.

Acceleration The air conditioning system switches off tem-

porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a

temporary rise in temperature.

Condensation In warm weather, condensation from the air

conditioning may drip under the car. This is

normal.

To ventilate the climate system's control sys-

tem the ventilation fan can be started up to 50

minutes after the car's ignition has been

switched off. The fan is then switched off auto-

matically after approx. 15 minutes.

Fuel economy With ECC, the air conditioning system is con-

trolled automatically and is used just enough to

cool the passenger compartment and dehu-

midify the incoming air. This provides better

fuel economy compared to conventional sys-

tems where the air conditioning cools the air to

just above freezing point.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 74

evastarck

03 Climate control

General information on climate control

03

75

Air distribution

G 02

73 30

Incoming air is distributed through several dif-

ferent vents located throughout the car.

Air vents in the dashboard

G 02

73 29

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents towards the side windows

to remove misting from the front side windows.

Cold weather: Close the centre vents for opti-

mum comfort and best demisting.

Panel vents in the door pillars

0

G 02

70 64

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow.

1. Aim the vents toward the rear side win-

dows to remove misting.

2. Aim the vents inwards in the car for a com-

fortable climate in the rear seat.

Bear in mind that small children can be sensi-

tive to airflow and draughts.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 75

evastarck

03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

03

76

Control panel

G 02

72 55

AC On/off (ON/OFF)

Recirculation

Air distribution

Rear window and door mirror defroster

Heated front seats

Heating/Cooling right-hand side

Heating/Cooling left-hand side

Fan

You must turn the fan knob from the 0 -

position to engage the air conditioning.

Use the air conditioning at low temperatures as

well (0-15 C) to dehumidify incoming air.

AC ON/OFF ON: The air conditioning is on.

It is controlled by the system's

AUTO function. This way,

incoming air is sufficiently

cooled and dehumidified. OFF:

OFF

When the defroster function is activated the air

conditioning is automatically switched on (can

be switched off with the A/C button).

Heating/Cooling left/right-hand side Turn to set how warm or cold

the incoming air shall be. For

cooler air, the air conditioning

must be engaged.

Heated front seats Proceed as follows for heated

front seat(s):

1. Press once: High heat both lamps in the

switch illuminate.

2. Press twice: Low heat one lamp in the

switch illuminates.

3. Press twice: Heating switched off no

lamps in the switch illuminate.

An authorised Volvo workshop can adjust the

temperature.

Fan Fan speed can be increased or

decreased by turning the knob.

If the knob is set to 0 then the

air conditioning is not engaged

Rear window and door mirror defrosters Use this button to quickly

remove misting and ice from

the rear window and door mir-

rors, see page 50 for further

information about this function.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 76

evastarck

03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

03

77

Recirculation Recirculation can be used to

shut out bad air, exhaust, etc.

from the passenger compart-

ment. The air in the passenger

compartment is recirculated,

i.e. no outside air is taken into

the car when this function is activated. Recir-

culation (together with the air conditioning sys-

tem) cools the passenger compartment more

quickly in a warm climate.

If you allow the air in the car to recirculate, there

is a risk of icing and misting, especially in win-

ter. The timer function minimises the risk of ice,

misting and bad air.

Activate the function as follows:

1. Press for more than 3 seconds. The lamp

flashes for 5 seconds. The air recirculates

in the car for 3 12 minutes depending on

the outside temperature.

2. The timer function is activated each time

you press .

To switch off the timer function:

Press again for more than 3 sec-

onds. The lamp illuminates for 5 seconds

to confirm your selection.

Air distribution Use the air distribution control

positions (marked with dots)

between the different symbols

to fine-tune air distribution for

maximum comfort.

Defroster

The defroster ( ) on the air distribution

control is used to quickly remove misting and

ice from the windscreen and side windows. Air

flows to the windows at high speed.

When the function is selected the following

also takes place to provide maximum dehu-

midification of the air in the passenger com-

partment:

the air conditioning (AC) is automatically engaged (can be switched off with the AC button).

recirculation is automatically disengaged.

When the defroster is switched off, the climate

control returns to the previous settings.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 77

evastarck

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Control panel

G 02

85 76

AC On/off (ON/OFF)

Recirculation/Multifilter with sensor*

Recirculation

AUTO

Air distribution

Passenger compartment temperature sen-

sor

Defroster, windscreen and side windows

Rear window and door mirror defroster

Seat heater right-hand side

Seat heater left-hand side

Temperature right-hand side

Temperature left-hand side

Fan

AUTO The AUTO function automati-

cally regulates climate control

so that the selected tempera-

ture is attained The automatic

function controls heating, air

conditioning, air quality sensor,

fan speed, recirculation and air distribution. If

you select one or more functions manually, the

other functions continue operating automati-

cally. All manual settings are switched off when

AUTO is pressed.

Temperature The two knobs can be used to

set the temperature for the pas-

senger and driver's sides of the

car. Remember that the car

does not heat up or cool down

any more quickly even if you

select a higher or lower temperature than you

want in the passenger compartment.

22 20

18 26 24

Fan Fan speed can be increased

or decreased by turning the

knob. If AUTO is selected

then fan speed is regulated

automatically. The previously

set fan speed is disengaged.

NOTE

If the knob for the fan has been turned so far that the left lamp above the knob illuminates with an orange light, the fan and the air con- ditioning system are switched off.

Rear window and door mirror defrosters Use this button to quickly

remove misting and ice from

the rear window and door mir-

rors, see page 50 for further

information about this function.

Defroster, windscreen and side windows Used to quickly remove misting

and ice from the windscreen

and side windows. Air flows to

the windows at high speed. The

lamp in the defroster button illu-

minates when this function is

engaged.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 78

evastarck

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

When the function is selected, the following

also takes place to provide maximum dehu-

midification of the air in the passenger com-

partment:

the air conditioning (AC) is automatically engaged (can be switched off with the AC button)

recirculation is automatically disengaged.

When the defroster is switched off, the

climate control returns to the previous settings.

Air distribution G

02 72

67

Air to windows.

Air to head and body

Air to legs and feet

Press AUTO to return to automatic air distri-

bution.

AC ON/OFF ON: The air conditioning is on.

It is controlled by the system's

AUTO function. This way,

incoming air is cooled and

dehumidified.

OFF: Off.

When the defroster function is activated the air

conditioning is automatically switched on (can

be switched off with the AC button).

Heated front seats Proceed as follows for heated

front seat(s):

1. Press once: High heat both lamps in the

switch illuminate.

2. Press twice: Low heat one lamp in the

switch illuminates.

3. Press twice: Heating switched off no

lamps in the switch illuminate.

An authorised Volvo workshop can adjust the

temperature.

Recirculation Recirculation can be used to

shut out bad air, exhaust, etc.

from the passenger compart-

ment. The air in the passenger

compartment is recirculated,

i.e. no outside air is taken into

the car when this function is

activated.

If you allow the air in the car to

recirculate, there is a risk of

icing and misting, especially in

winter.

MAN AUT

The timer function (cars with Multifilter and air

quality sensor have no timer function) mini-

mises the risk for ice, misting and bad air.

Activate the function as follows:

1. Press for more than 3 seconds. The

lamp flashes for 5 seconds. The air recir-

culates in the car for 3 12 minutes

depending on the outside temperature.

2. The timer function is activated each time

you press .

To switch off the timer function:

Press again for more than 3 seconds.

The lamp illuminates for 5 seconds to confirm

your selection..

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 79

evastarck

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Air quality system* The air quality system consists

of a multi-filter and a sensor.

The filter separates gases and

particles to reduce the levels of

odours and pollution in the pas-

senger compartment. When the

sensor detects polluted outside air, the air

intakes are closed and the air in the passenger

compartment is recirculated.

MAN AUT

A green light (AUT) illuminates in the button

when the air quality sensor is active.

Operation Press AUTO to activate the air quality sensor

(normal setting).

Or:

Select one of the following three functions by

repeatedly pressing AUTO.

The lamp for AUT illuminates The air qual- ity sensor is now activated.

No lamp illuminates. Recirculation is not activated unless needed to cool in a warm climate.

The lamp for MAN illuminates Recircula- tion is now activated.

Keep the following in mind:

Make it a rule to have the air quality sensor activated at all times.

Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.

If misting occurs, you should deactivate the air quality sensor.

If misting occurs, you can use the defroster functions for the windscreen, side win- dows and rear window, see page 78.

Follow the Volvo service programme for the

recommended replacement interval of the Mul-

tifilter. If the car is used in environments where

more contaminants are present, it may be nec-

essary to change the Multifilter more often.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 80

evastarck

03 Climate control

Air distribution

03

81

Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:

Air through front and

rear panel vents.

When you want good

cooling in a warm cli-

mate.

Air to floor. There is a

certain amount of air-

flow to the panel vents

and the defroster

vents for the wind-

screen and side win-

dows.

When you want to

warm your feet.

Air to windows

Air is not recirculated

in this position. Air

conditioning is always

engaged. There is a

certain amount of air-

flow to the panel

vents.

When you want to

remove ice and mist-

ing. High fan speed is

good for this.

Air to floor and panel

vents.

In sunny weather with

cool outside tempera-

tures.

Air to both floor and

windows. There is a

certain amount of air-

flow to the panel

vents.

When you want com-

fortable conditions

and good demisting in

a cold climate. Not too

low a fan speed.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 81

evastarck

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven parking heater*

03

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information about heaters

G 02

70 95

READ button

Thumbwheel

RESET button

The electrical system must be "awakened"

before the parking heater can be programmed.

This is most easily done by:

pressing the READ button or

activating main beam or

turning on the ignition.

The parking heater can be started immediately

or set with two different start times using

TIMER 1 and TIMER 2. Here, start time refers

to the time the car is heated and ready.

The car's electronic system calculates when

heating should be started based on the outside

temperature. The heater is not run if the outside

temperature exceeds 25 C. At temperatures

of -10 C and below, the maximum running

time of the parking heater is 60 minutes.

If the parking heater does not start despite

repeated attempts, a message is shown in the

display. Contact an authorised Volvo work-

shop.

WARNING

The car must be outdoors when the parking heater is used.

Switch off the parking heater before refuel- ling. Fuel which spills out could be ignited.

Check in the display that the parking heater is off. (When the parking heater is running, PARK HEAT ON is shown in the display.)

Messages in the display

Once the settings for TIMER 1, TIMER 2 and

DIRECT START have been activated, the

amber warning symbol in the combined instru-

ment panel illuminates and explanatory text is

shown in the display.

When you leave the car, you will receive a mes-

sage regarding the current settings of the sys-

tem. The message disappears when the car is

locked from the outside using the remote con-

trol.

G 02

72 26

Warning decal on fuel filler flap.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 82

evastarck

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven parking heater*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83

Parking on a hill

If you park your car on a steep incline, the front

of the car should be facing up the slope to

ensure the supply of fuel to the parking heater.

Car clock/timer

For safety reasons, all timer settings will be

cleared if the car clock is reset after timer set-

tings have been made.

Setting TIMER 1 and 2

For reasons of safety, you can only programme

times for the following 24 hours, not several

days in a row.

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel until TIMER 1 is shown in the display.

2. Touch the RESET button so that the hours

setting starts to flash.

3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to the desired

hour.

4. Briefly press the RESET button so that the

minutes setting starts to flash

5. Scroll with the thumbwheel to the desired

minute.

6. Briefly press the RESET button to confirm

your setting.

7. Press the RESET button to activate the

timer.

After setting TIMER 1, scroll to TIMER 2. The

settings are made in the same way as for

TIMER 1.

Deactivating timer-started parking

heater Proceed as follows to manually switch off the

parking heater before the set time has elapsed:

1. Press the READ button (A)

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to the text

PARK HEAT TIMER 1 (or 2). The text

ON flashes on the display.

3. Press the RESET button. The text OFF is

shown with a constant glow and the park-

ing heater is switched off.

Direct start of the parking heater 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel until DIRECT

START is shown in the display.

2. Press the RESET button to access the

options ON or OFF.

3. Select ON.

The parking heater will now run for 60 minutes.

Heating of the passenger compartment will

begin as soon as the engine coolant has

reached an adequate temperature.

Deactivating direct-started parking

heater 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel until DIRECT

START is shown in the display.

2. Press the RESET button to access the

options ON or OFF.

3. Select OFF.

Battery and fuel

If the battery is not sufficiently charged or the

petrol tank is close to empty, the parking heater

will be switched off.

If this is the case, a message will appear in the

display. Acknowledge the message using the

READ button.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.

If the parking heater is used regularly, the car must be driven for the same time as the parking heater is used in order to ensure that the alternator has time to charge the battery.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 83

evastarck

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven parking heater*

03

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Additional heater (diesel)*

Extra heat from the additional heater may be

required in cold weather to reach the correct

temperature in the passenger compartment.

The additional heater starts automatically

when extra heat is required if the engine is run-

ning. It is switched off automatically when the

correct temperature is reached or when the

engine is switched off.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 84

evastarck

03 Climate control

03

85

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 85

evastarck

G 02

09 08

86

Front seats.............................................................................................. 88

Interior lighting........................................................................................ 90

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment..................................... 92

Rear seat................................................................................................. 96

Cargo area.............................................................................................. 97

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 86

evastarck

04 INTERIOR

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 87

evastarck

04 Interior

Front seats

04

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seating position

G 02

72 14

The driver's and passenger seats can be

adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving

positions

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust

the distance to the steering wheel and ped-

als. Check that the seat is locked after

changing position.

Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,

pump up/down*.

Raise/lower seat: pump up/down

Lumbar support 1, turn the wheel.

Backrest rake: turn the wheel.

Control panel for power seat.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving.

Check that the seat is locked in position.

Tipping the front seat backrest*

G 01

48 05

The passenger seat backrest can be folded

forward to make room for long loads.

1. Move the seat as far back as possible.

2. Adjust the backrest to an upright position

90 degrees.

3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest

while folding it forwards.

4. Slide the seat forward so that the head

restraint is "locked in place" under the glo-

vebox.

Floor mats*

Volvo supplies floor mats especially produced

for your car

WARNING

The floor mat at the driver's seat must be firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals.

1 Also applies to power seat.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 88

evastarck

04 Interior

Front seats

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89

Power seat*

G 02

70 36

The seats can be adjusted for a certain time

after unlocking the door with the remote con-

trol without the key being inserted into the igni-

tion switch. The seats can always be set when

the ignition is on.

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat forward/rearward

Seat up/down

Backrest rake

An overload protection is deployed if one of the

seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the

ignition and wait a short time before adjusting

the seat again. Only one of the seat's motors

can be used at a time.

Seat with memory function*

G 02

70 37

Buttons for memory function.

Store setting 1. Adjust seat.

2. Press and hold button MEM while pressing

button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.

Using a stored setting Press one of the memory buttons 13 until the

seat stops. If you release the button then the

movement of the seat will stop.

Key memory in remote control key The driver's seat positions are stored in the key

memory when the car has been locked with the

remote control key. When the car is unlocked

with the same remote control key the driver's

seat and rearview mirrors adopt the stored

positions when the driver's door is opened.

NOTE

The key memory is independent of the seat memory.

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press

one of the buttons to stop the function.

WARNING

Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do not play with the controls.

Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment.

Ensure that none of the backseat passen- gers will be trapped.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 89

evastarck

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

90

Reading lamps and interior lighting

G 02

69 60

Controls in roof console for front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp left-hand front

Interior lighting

Reading lamp right-hand front

Passenger compartment lighting 1 is switched

on and off with a short press on button (2), at

the same time automatic lighting is activated,

see page 91.

All lighting in the passenger compartment can

be switched on in ignition position I and II as

well as when the engine is running. The lighting

can also be activated within 10 minutes after:

the engine has been switched off and the ignition is in position 0

the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.

Following which, it is switched off automati-

cally.

Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on and

off using buttons (1) and (3) respectively.

Rear roof lighting

G 02

71 53

Reading lamps, rear.

Reading lamp left-hand rear

Reading lamp right-hand rear

The rear reading lamps are switched on and off

using buttons (4) and (5) respectively.

Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-

ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-

tively when a side door is opened or closed.

1 Courtesy lighting follows the interior lighting.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 90

evastarck

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91

Glovebox lighting

Glovebox lighting is switched on and off

respectively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror*

G 02

02 10

The light illuminates automatically when the

cover is lifted.

Automatic lighting Automatic lighting can be disengaged by

pressing button (2), see page 90, and holding

it depressed for more than 3 seconds. A short

press on the button re-engages automatic

lighting.

When automatic lighting is activated the pas-

senger compartment lighting is switched on

automatically 2 and remains on for 30 seconds:

the car is unlocked with the key or remote control

the engine is switched off and the key is turned to the 0 position.

Passenger compartment lighting is switched

on and remains on for 10 minutes if one of the

doors is open and the passenger compartment

lighting is not switched off.

The interior lighting is switched off when:

the engine is started

the car is locked with the key or remote control.

The programmed times, 30 seconds and

10 minutes, can be changed by a Volvo work-

shop.

2 The function is light-dependent and is only activated when it is dark.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 91

evastarck

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

92

Storage spaces

G 02

72 19

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 92

evastarck

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

Sunglasses compartment, driver's side*

Storage pocket

Ticket clip

Cup holder*

Glovebox

Storage compartment in the centre con-

sole

Compartment in door panel

Cup holder in the armrest, rear seat

Storage pocket

WARNING

Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects lie or protrude in such a way that they could cause injury during heavy braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Storage compartment in centre console

G 02

72 15

Rear storage compartment - The rear stor-

age compartment of the centre console

can be used to store CDs and similar. This

storage compartment can be equipped

with privacy handset + holder*.

Front storage compartment (roller cover) -

This storage compartment can be equip-

ped with the following options:

Cup holder*

Ashtray*

12 V socket

Ashtray*

Rear storage compartment cup holder for rear seat passengers

G 02

72 16

To access the storage compartment/privacy

handset, press the button on the left-hand side

of the armrest and fold the tunnel compartment

cover back.

To use the cup holder, press the button on the

right-hand side of the armrest and fold the

upper part of the tunnel compartment cover

back. The cup holder and cover can be closed

separately.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 93

evastarck

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Cup holder in front storage compartment*

The cup holder can be easily removed:

Press the cup holder forwards,

while lifting it at the rear edge.

Push the cup holder back, into the cut-out,

under the roller cover.

Angle the front edge of the cup holder up

and lift out.

Repeat the procedure in reverse order to refit

the cup holder.

Instrument panel cup holder*

G 02

72 25

Press the holder to open.

Press the holder in after use.

NOTE

Never use glass bottles. Remember also that hot drinks may cause burns.

Glovebox

G 02

73 51

Location of e.g. fuel cards in the glovebox.

The glovebox can be used to store things such

as the owner's manual, maps, pens and petrol

cards.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 94

evastarck

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95

Coat hanger

G 02

73 28

The coat hanger is only intended for light gar-

ments.

Bottle holder for rear seat passengers*

G 02

72 22

Proceed as follows to use the bottle holder:

1. Open the holder.

2. Insert the bottle.

The bottle holder can also serve as a waste bin.

Insert a bag into the holder and fold it over the

edges.

NOTE

The bin does not require special bags. Use a regular plastic bag.

Cup holder in the armrest, rear seat*

G 02

72 13

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 95

evastarck

04 Interior

Rear seat

04

96

Head restraints in the rear seat

G 02

80 74

Adjusting the vertical position of the head restraint.

The centre seat head restraint can be adjusted

vertically to suit the height of the passenger.

Raise the head restraint as necessary. Raise

the head restraint as needed. The release but-

ton on one of the supports must be pressed to

push the head restraint down. See the illustra-

tion.

Tipping the rear seat backrest

8503282m

G 02

73 27

Both rear seat backrests can be tipped for-

ward, together or individually. This makes it

easier to transport long objects.

Fold the rear seat backrests as follows:

1. First check that the head restraints have

not been lowered.

2. Pull the handle in the cargo area as shown

in the illustration.

3. Fold the backrest forward.

G 02

80 03

A hatch in the right-hand rear backrest allows

you to transport long objects such as skis and

planks.

Open the hatch as follows:

1. Fold the left-hand backrest and centre

armrest forwards.

2. Release the hatch by pushing the catch

upward while folding the hatch forward.

3. Tip the backrest back into position with the

hatch open.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 96

evastarck

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

Hatch for long objects

G 02

80 68

Use the seatbelt to secure the load.

Integrated booster cushion The cover on the armrest/child seat has no

hinge. The cover must be removed before the

ski hatch is used.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with integrated booster cushion, fold this out first.

When removing 1. Open the cover 30.

2. Pull straight up.

When fitting 1. Move the cover back in the grooves behind

the upholstery.

2. Close the cover.

WARNING

Always secure the load. Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing personal injury to the car's occupants.

Cover sharp edges with something soft.

Turn off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects! Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load and cause a gear to engage and the car to move off.

Bag holder*

G 02

72 23

Open the hatch in the cargo area. Hang or

secure your grocery bags using the tensioning

straps.

General Payload depends on the car's total kerb

weight, including any accessories that are

mounted.

Kerb weight includes the driver, the weight of

the fuel tank when filled to 90% and various

fluids, such as washer fluid and coolant.

Mounted accessories, i.e. towbar, load carri-

ers, space box, etc., are included in the kerb

weight.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 97

evastarck

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

98

The load capacity of the car is reduced by the

number of passengers and their weight.

WARNING

The driving characteristics of the car change based on its kerb weight and how heavily it is loaded.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 98

evastarck

04 Interior

04

99

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 99

evastarck

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keys and remote controls..................................................................... 102

Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 104

Child safety locks.................................................................................. 107

Alarm*.................................................................................................... 108

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 100

evastarck

05 LOCKS AND ALARM

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 101

evastarck

05 Locks and alarm

Keys and remote controls

05

102

Keys

G 03

01 79

Master key This key opens all locks.

The car is delivered with two master keys and

one service key 1. The master keys are collaps-

ible and equipped with an integrated remote

control. The service key does not unlock the

glovebox.

Loss of key If you should lose one of your keys, bring the

remaining keys to an authorised Volvo work-

shop. The code of the missing key must be

erased from the system as a theft prevention

measure. The other keys must be re-coded in

the system at the same time.

The key blades' unique code is available at

authorised Volvo workshops, who can order

new key blades.

A maximum of six remote controls/key blades

can be programmed and used for one single

car.

Immobiliser

The keys are fitted with coded chips. The code

must be accepted by the reader (receiver) in

the ignition switch. The car can only be started

if the correct key with the correct code is used.

NOTE

The master key blade (1) must be fully extended (as illustrated) when starting the car. Otherwise there is a risk that the immo- biliser function will prevent the car from star- ting.

Ignition keys and electronic immobiliser The ignition key must not hang with other keys

or metal objects on the same key ring. The

electronic immobiliser could be activated erro-

neously and the car will not start.

Remote control functions

G 02

70 13

Unlocking

Press the button once to unlock all doors, the

boot lid and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.

Boot lid

Press the button twice to unlock the boot lid

only.

Panic alarm function

The panic alarm function can be used to attract

attention in an emergency.

Press and hold the red button for at least 3

seconds or press it 2 times within the same

1 Certain markets.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 102

evastarck

05 Locks and alarm

Keys and remote controls

05

103

space of time to activate the direction indica-

tors and the horn.

The panic alarm is deactivated automatically

after 25 seconds or by pressing any of the but-

tons on the remote control.

Approach lighting

Do the following when you approach the car:

Press the yellow button on the remote con-

trol.

The interior lighting, position/parking lamps,

number plate lighting and door mirror lamps

(option) will switch on. These lamps will remain

lit for 30, 60 or 90 seconds. An authorised

Volvo workshop can select a suitable time set-

ting.

To extinguish the approach lighting:

Press the yellow button again.

Locking

Lock all doors, boot lid and fuel filler flap with

the button.

There is a delay of approx. 10 minutes for the

fuel filler flap.

Folding/opening key

The key can be folded by pressing the button

while folding the key blade into the keypad.

The folding key will open automatically with

one press of the button.

Changing the remote control battery

G 02

70 11

Replace the battery after repeated failure by

the locks to respond when remote control sig-

nals are transmitted within a normal distance.

1. Remove the cover by carefully prising up

the rear edge of with a small screwdriver.

2. Replace the battery (type CR 2032, 3 V)

with the plus side facing up. Avoid touch-

ing the battery and its terminals with your

fingers.

3. Refit the cover. Make sure the rubber seal

is properly fitted and free from damage to

prevent water from entering.

Turn the old battery in to your Volvo workshop

so that it can be disposed of in an environmen-

tally friendly manner.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 103

evastarck

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

104

Locking/unlocking the car from outside

G 02

72 06

The master key or remote control locks/

unlocks all side doors and the tailgate simulta-

neously. The side door lock buttons and inside

handles are disengaged 1

The fuel filler flap can be opened when the car

is unlocked. The flap remains unlocked for

10 minutes after the car has been locked.

The car can be locked1 even if a door or the

boot lid is open. When the door is closed there

is a risk that the keys will be locked in.

Automatic relocking

If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened

within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked

again automatically. This function prevents the

car from being left unlocked unintentionally.

For cars with alarms, see page 108.

Automatic locking

G 02

96 47

Automatic locking is activated and reactivated

from the control panel in the driver's door.

The function operates by locking the doors

automatically when the speed of the car

exceeds 7 km/h. They remain locked until a

door is opened from the inside or when all

doors are unlocked from the control panel.

Activating/deactivating 1. The ignition key must be in position I or II.

2. Press the READ button in the left-hand

stalk switch to acknowledge any mes-

sages on the display.

3. Press and hold the button for central lock-

ing until a new message for lock status is

shown in the display.

The messages AUTOLOCK ACTIVATED (the

car is also locked when it moves) and

AUTOLOCK DEACTIVATED respectively are

shown on the display.

1 Applies to certain markets

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 104

evastarck

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

Locking/unlocking the car from inside

G 02

96 47

All the doors and the boot lid can be locked or

unlocked simultaneously using the control

panel in the driver's door (or passenger door).

All doors can be locked using the lock button

on the control panel by each respective door.

If the car is not locked from the outside then it

can be unlocked by opening the door with the

handle. 2

Unlocking/locking the boot lid

With remote control Proceed as follows in order to unlock the boot

lid only:

Press twice on the remote control button

to open the boot lid.

The boot lid is unlocked and opened

slightly at the same time.

If all doors are locked when the boot lid closes,

it locks automatically.

With master key

G 02

72 08

The master key must only be used during

emergencies for unlocking the boot lid man-

ually, e.g. if the remote control does not func-

tion or the car is without power. Open the boot

lid as follows:

1. Insert the master key into the upper or

lower section of the lid covering the lock.

2. Twist up or down in order to prise the lid

off.

3. Unlock the boot lid.

Service locking, boot lid*

G 02

71 72

2 Applies to certain markets.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 105

evastarck

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

106

This function is intended for when the car is left

for service, with a hotel parking valet or similar.

The service key is left with the staff, who can

open and drive the car but do not have access

to the boot lid (or the glovebox if it is locked

with the master key).

To activate service locking 1. Turn the master key to position II.

2. Press the button. A lamp in the button illu-

minates when the function is activated and

a message is shown in the display.

To deactivate service locking Turn the master key to position II and press

the button again.

Locking the glovebox

The glovebox can only be locked/opened

using the master key not with the service key.

Deadlocks

Your car has a special deadlock function,

which means that the doors cannot be opened

from the inside if they are locked.

Deadlocks can only be activated from the out-

side by the driver's door being locked with the

key or remote control. All doors must be closed

before deadlocks can be activated. Once acti-

vated, the doors cannot be opened from the

inside.

The car can only be unlocked from the outside

via the driver's door or with the remote control.

Deadlocks are engaged after a 25 second

delay once the doors have been closed

Temporary deactivation

G 02

72 30

If someone is going to stay in the car but the

doors must be locked from the outside, then

the deadlocks function can be temporarily

switched off.

1. Insert the key into the ignition switch, turn

it to position II and then back to position I

or 0.

2. Press the button.

If the car is equipped with an alarm, movement

and tilt detectors are also deactivated, see

page 109.

The light in the button is illuminated until the

car is locked with the key or the remote control.

A message remains on the display as long as

the key is in the ignition switch.

Next time the engine is started the system is

reset to zero and the deadlocks function and

the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are

then re-engaged.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with an alarm:

Remember that the car's alarm is armed when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without deactivating the deadlocks func- tion.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 106

evastarck

05 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

05

107

Mechanical child safety locks rear doors

The child safety locks are located on the trailing

edge of the rear doors and are only accessible

when the doors are open.

Use a flat metal object, such as a screwdriver,

to turn the control and thus activate or deacti-

vate the child safety lock.

A

B

G 02

15 14

Control for child safety lock left-hand rear door.

G 02

15 15

Child safety lock controls right-hand rear door.

Child-safe position the rear doors cannot

be opened from inside: Turn outwards.

Not child-safe position the rear doors can

be opened from inside: Turn inwards.

NOTE

As long as the child safety lock is activated the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 107

evastarck

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The alarm system

When the alarm is armed, it continually moni-

tors all alarm inputs. The alarm is triggered if:

the bonnet is opened

the boot lid is opened

a side door is opened

the ignition switch is turned with a non- approved key or subjected to force

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment if it is fitted with a movement detector*.

the car is raised or towed away if it is fitted with a tilt detector*.

a battery cable is disconnected.

anyone tries to disconnect the siren.

Alarm indicator

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates

the alarm system's status:

LED not lit the alarm is not armed.

The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed.

The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm and until the ignition is switched on the alarm has been triggered.

If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message

appears on the display. Contact an authorised

Volvo workshop.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance.

Activating the alarm

Press the LOCK button on the remote control.

A long flash signal from the direction indicators

of the car confirms that the alarm is armed and

all doors are closed. In certain markets, the key

or the control in the driver's door can be used

to arm the alarm.

IMPORTANT

The alarm is fully armed when the car's direction indicators have made one long flash and the LED on the instrument panel flashes once every other second.

Deactivating the alarm

Press the UNLOCK button on the remote con-

trol. Two short flashes from the car's direction

indicators confirm that the alarm has been

deactivated.

If the remote control batteries are discharged

then the alarm can be disarmed by turning the

key to ignition position II.

Automatic alarm activation

If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened

within two minutes of the alarm being dis-

armed, and the car was unlocked with the

remote control, the car re-arms the alarm auto-

matically. The car is locked at the same time.

This function prevents you from accidentally

leaving the car without the alarm on.

In certain countries (e.g. Belgium, Israel) the

alarm is reactivated after a certain delay if the

driver's door was opened and closed but the

car was not re-locked.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 108

evastarck

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109

Deactivating a triggered alarm

Press the UNLOCK button on the remote con-

trol if the alarm sounds and you wish to deac-

tivate it. Confirmation is given by two short

flashes from the direction indicators.

Audio signal Alarm The audio signal is given from a siren with a

reserve battery. Each alarm signal lasts 25 sec-

onds.

Visual signal Alarm When the alarm is triggered, all direction indi-

cators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is

deactivated as described earlier.

Reduced alarm level

G 02

72 28

To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm -

for example when leaving a dog in the car or

during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt

detectors can be temporarily switched off.

1. Insert the key into the ignition switch, turn

it to position II and then back to position I

or 0.

2. Press the button.

The light in the button is illuminated until the

car is locked with the key or the remote control.

A message remains on the display as long as

the key is in the ignition switch.

If the car is equipped with the deadlocks func-

tion then it is switched off at the same time, see

page 106.

Next time the engine is started the system is

reset to zero and the movement and tilt detec-

tors and the deadlocks function are then re-

engaged.

Testing the alarm system

Testing the passenger compartment

motion sensor: 1. Open all the windows.

2. Arm the alarm. Activation of the alarm is

confirmed by the lamp flashing slowly.

3. Please wait 30 seconds.

4. Test the movement detector in the pas-

senger compartment, such as by lifting out

a bag from a seat. The alarm will now

sound and flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car

with the remote control.

Testing the doors 1. Arm the alarm.

2. Please wait 30 seconds.

3. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade.

4. Open one of the doors. The alarm will now

sound and flash.

5. Repeat the test for the other doors.

6. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car

with the remote control.

Testing the bonnet 1. Get into the car and deactivate the move-

ment detector.

2. Arm the alarm (remain in the car and lock

the doors with the button on the remote

control).

3. Please wait 30 seconds.

4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the

dashboard. The alarm will now sound and

flash.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 109

evastarck

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car

with the remote control.

Testing the boot lid: 1. Arm the alarm.

2. Please wait 30 seconds.

3. Unlock with the key on the driver's side

without opening any of the doors.

4. Open the boot lid with the handle. The

alarm will now sound and flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car

with the remote control.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 110

evastarck

05 Locks and alarm

05

111

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 111

evastarck

G 02

09 12

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General.................................................................................................. 114

Refuelling.............................................................................................. 116

Starting the car...................................................................................... 118

Manual gearbox.................................................................................... 120

Automatic gearbox................................................................................ 121

All-wheel drive AWD*......................................................................... 124

Brake system........................................................................................ 125

Stability and traction control system*................................................... 127

Active chassis FOUR-C*.................................................................... 129

Parking assistance*............................................................................... 130

Towing and recovery............................................................................. 132

Start assistance.................................................................................... 134

Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 135

Towing equipment*............................................................................... 137

Detachable towbar*............................................................................... 139

Load on the roof.................................................................................... 143

Adjusting headlamp pattern.................................................................. 145

BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*................................................. 152

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 112

evastarck

06 STARTING AND DRIVING

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 113

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

General

06

114

Economical driving

Driving economically means driving smoothly

while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving

style and speed to the prevailing conditions.

For more advice on reducing environmental

impact. see page 12.

Keep in mind the following:

Get the engine warmed up as soon as pos- sible! That is to say: do not let the engine idle, but drive with a light load as soon as you can.

A cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

Avoid driving short distances where the engine never has time to reach operating temperature.

Drive gently! Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking.

Do not drive with unnecessary, heavy loads in the car.

Do not use winter tyres when the roads are clear and dry.

Remove the load carrier when it is not in use.

Do not open side windows unnecessarily.

Do not drive with an open boot lid!

If you drive with the boot lid open, some of the

exhaust gases and poisonous carbon monox-

ide could be sucked into the car through the

cargo area. If you must drive a short distance

with the boot lid open, proceed as follows:

1. Close all windows.

2. Distribute the air between the windscreen

and floor while running the fan at high

speed.

Your new car slippery road surfaces

Driving on a slippery road may feel different

depending on whether you choose a car with a

manual or an automatic gearbox. Practice skid

driving under controlled conditions so that you

know how your new car reacts.

Driving in water

The car can be driven through water at a maxi-

mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of

10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised

when passing through flowing water.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In greater depths, water can enter the trans- mission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of the systems.

During driving in water, maintain a low speed

and do not stop the car. When the water has

been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly

and check that full brake function is achieved.

Water and mud for example can make the

brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake

function.

NOTE

Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.

IMPORTANT

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time. This could cause electrical malfunctions.

In the event of engine stop in water do not try restart. Tow the car from the water.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 114

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

General

06

115

Do not overload the battery

The electrical functions in the car load the bat-

tery to varying degrees. Avoid having the igni-

tion key in position II when the engine is turned

off. Use position I instead, as less power is

used. The 12 volt outlet in the cargo area sup-

plies power even when the ignition key is

removed.

Examples of functions that use a lot of power:

ventilation fan

windscreen wipers

audio system

parking lights

Also, be aware of different accessories that

load the electrical system. Do not use functions

which use a lot of power when the engine is

switched off.

A text is shown in the display in the combined

instrument panel if battery voltage is low. This

message remains in the display in the com-

bined instrument panel until the engine has

started.

The energy-saving function shuts down certain

functions or reduces the load on the battery by,

for example, slowing the ventilation fan and

switching off the audio system.

Charge the battery by starting the engine.

Do not allow the engine and cooling system to overheat

Under certain conditions, e.g. when driving in

hilly terrain and with a heavy load, there is a risk

of the engine and cooling system overheating.

To avoid overheating in the cooling

system:

Drive at low speeds if driving with a trailer up a long incline.

Switch off the air conditioning temporarily.

Avoid letting the engine idle.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop, if the car has been driven hard.

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille if driving in extreme high tem- peratures.

To avoid the engine overheating: Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm

(diesel engines: 3500 rpm) if driving with a

trailer or caravan in hilly terrain. The oil tem-

perature could then become too high.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 115

evastarck

Especially in warm weather.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

116

Opening the fuel filler flap

G 02

70 73

The fuel cap is inside the fuel filler flap on the right- hand rear wing and hangs up on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

The fuel filler flap can be opened when the car

is unlocked.

NOTE

The filler flap remains unlocked for ten minutes after the car has been locked.

Emergency opening of the fuel filler flap

G 02

72 12

The fuel filler flap can be opened manually

when necessary if it cannot be opened nor-

mally.

1. There is a detachable hatch on the right-

2. insert your hand and locate the flap's elec- trical lock location is approximately inside the rear edge of the fuel filler flap.

3. Pull the lock plunger straight back.

WARNING

There are sharp edges behind the panel so move your hands slowly and carefully.

Fuel cap

A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in

the event of high outside temperatures. Open

the cap slowly.

NOTE

After refuelling, replace the fuel cap and turn until one or more clicks is heard.

WARNING

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling the ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

Refuelling with petrol

Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump

nozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

Do not add cleaning additives unless spe- cifically recommended by a Volvo work- shop.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 116

evastarck

hand panel of the cargo area. Undo this.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

117

IMPORTANT

Petrol-powered cars must always be refu- elled with unleaded petrol so as not to dam- age the catalytic converter.

Refuelling with diesel

At low temperatures (-5 C to -40 C), a paraffin

precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which

can lead to ignition problems. Make sure you

use a special winter grade fuel during cold peri-

ods.

Diesel particle filter (DPF)

Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,

which results in more efficient emission con-

trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are

collected in the filter during normal driving. So-

called "regeneration" is started in order to burn

away the particles and empty the filter. This

requires the engine to have reached normal

operating temperature.

Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-

ically at an interval of approximately

300 900 km depending on driving conditions.

Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It

may take a little longer at a low average speed.

Fuel consumption may increase slightly during

regeneration.

Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in

cold weather then the engine does not reach

normal operating temperature. This means that

regeneration of the diesel particle filter does

not take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approximately

80% full of particles, a yellow warning triangle

illuminates on the instrument panel, and the

message, SOOT FILTER FULL SEE

MANUAL is shown on the instrument panel

display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car

until the engine reaches normal operating tem-

perature, preferably on a main road or motor-

way. The car should then be driven for

approximately 20 minutes more. When regen-

eration is underway the engine power is

reduced.

When regeneration is complete the warning

message is cleared automatically.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that

the engine reaches normal operating tempera-

ture more quickly.

IMPORTANT

If the filter fills up it may be incapable of functioning. Then it can be difficult to start the engine and there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 117

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Starting the car

06

118

Before starting the engine

Apply the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Gear selector in position P or N.

Manual gearbox Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutch

pedal fully depressed. This is particularly

important in very cold conditions.

WARNING

Never remove the ignition key from the steering lock while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock could oth- erwise be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.

The ignition key must be in position II when the car is being towed.

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is in order that the emis- sions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

The master key blade must be fully extended (see illustration on page 102) when starting the car. Otherwise there is a risk that the immobiliser function will pre- vent the car from starting.

Starting the engine

Petrol Turn the ignition key to the start position.

If the engine does not start within 5-10 sec-

onds, release the key and repeat the start

attempt.

Diesel Turn the ignition key to the drive position.

An indicator symbol in the combined instru-

ment panel illuminates to show that engine

preheating is underway, see page 46.

Turn the ignition key to the start position when

the indicator symbol goes out.

Ignition switch and steering lock

0 Locked position The steering wheel locks

when the ignition key is

removed.

I Radio position Certain electrical compo-

nents can be switched on.

The engine's electrical sys-

tem is not activated.

II Driving position The key position when driv-

ing. The car's entire electrical

system is energised.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 118

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Starting the car

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119

III Start position The starter motor is engaged.

When the key is released it

springs back automatically to

the driving position, once the

engine has started. If the key

is hard to turn, the front

wheels may be turned in such

a way that there is tension in the steering wheel

lock. In which case, turn the wheel back and

forth to make it easier to turn the key.

Ensuring that the steering wheel is locked

when you leave the car minimises the risk of

theft.

Ignition keys and electronic immobiliser

The ignition key must not hang with other keys

or metal objects on the same key ring. The

electronic immobiliser could be activated acci-

dentally. If this happens, remove the excess

keys and restart the car.

Never rev the engine hard straight after a cold

start! If the engine does not start or misfires,

contact a Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Never remove the ignition key from the steering lock while driving or when the car is being towed. Never switch off the ignition (key to position 0) or remove the ignition key while the car is in motion. The steering lock could otherwise be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.

Speed related power steering*

If the car is equipped with speed related power

steering this means that it is easier to steer at

low speeds, which in turn facilitates parking

etc.

As speed is increased the steering force is

adapted to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 119

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Manual gearbox

06

120

Gear positions, five-speed

G 02

73 05

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear

change. Take your foot off the clutch pedal

between gear changes. Follow the shifting pat-

tern indicated.

For the best possible fuel economy, use the

highest gear possible as often as possible.

Reverse gear inhibitor

G 02

79 95

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-

ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse

gear during normal forward travel.

Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-

tionary.

To engage reverse gear, the gear lever must

first be moved to neutral (between 3rd and 4th

gear). Accordingly, reverse cannot be directly

engaged from 5th gear due to the reverse gear

inhibitor.

Gear positions, six-speed

G 02

71 99

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear

change. Take your foot off the clutch pedal

between gear changes. Follow the shifting pat-

tern indicated.

For the best possible fuel economy, use the

highest gear possible as often as possible.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 120

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

121

Manual positions

G 03

11 05

P Park Select this position when you wish to start the

engine or park the car.

The car should be stationary when you select

P!

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the

P position is engaged. Always apply the park-

ing brake when parking the car!

R Reverse The car should be stationary when you select

R!

N Neutral N is the neutral position. No gear is engaged

and the engine can be started. Apply the park-

ing brake when the car is stationary with the

gear selector in position N.

D Drive D is the normal driving position. The car auto-

matically shifts between the different gears of

the gearbox based on the level of acceleration

and speed. The car must be stationary when

the gear selector is moved to position D from

position R.

4 Low gear Up and downshifts between 1st, 2nd, 3rd and

4th are automatic. There is no upshift to 5th

gear.

Position 4 can be used:

for mountain driving

when driving with a trailer

to increase engine braking

3 Low gear Up and downshifts between 1st, 2nd and 3rd

are automatic. There is no upshift to 4th gear.

Position 3 can be used:

for mountain driving

when driving with a trailer

to increase engine braking

L Low gear Select L if you wish to drive in 1st or 2nd. Posi-

tion L gives the best engine braking for moun-

tain driving, etc.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G 03

11 09

The gear selector can be moved forward and

back freely between N and D. Other positions

are locked with a latch that is released with the

inhibitor button on the gear selector.

Press the inhibitor button to move the lever for-

ward or back between the different gear posi-

tions.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 121

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

122

Geartronic

G 02

79 97

Gear positions To move from the automatic driving position

D to a manual position, move the gear selector

to the left.

To go from position MAN to the automatic driv-

ing position D, move the selector to position

D.

Manual positions

G 02

02 37

To move from the automatic driving position

D to a manual position, move the gear selector

to the left. To go from position MAN to the

automatic driving position, move the selector

to position D.

While driving The manual gearshift mode can be selected at

any time while driving. The engaged gear is

locked until you choose another gear. The car

will only shift down automatically if you slow

down to a very slow speed.

If the gear selector is moved to (minus) the

car changes down a gear and engine brakes at

the same time. If the gear selector is moved to

+ (plus) the car changes up a gear.

W Winter

The W button by the gear selector

engages and disengages the win-

ter programme W. The symbol W is shown in the combined instru-

ment panel when the winter pro-

gramme is activated.

The winter programme starts the gearbox in

3rd gear to make it easier to pull off on slippery

roads. When the programme is engaged, lower

gears are activated only by kick-down.

The W programme can only be selected in

position D.

Kick-down

When the accelerator is pressed all the way to

the floor, beyond the position normally regar-

ded as full acceleration, a lower gear is imme-

diately engaged. This is known as kick-down.

When maximum speed for this gear is reached,

or if the accelerator is released from the kick-

down position, the gearbox automatically

changes up.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 122

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

123

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-

tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

To prevent overrevving, the gearbox control

program has a protective downshift inhibitor.

The kick-down function 1 cannot be used in the

manual positions. Return to automatic position

D.

Cold start

When starting in low temperatures, the gear

changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due

to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low tempera-

tures. To reduce engine emissions, the gear-

box shifts up later than normal when the engine

is started at low temperatures.

Turbo engine When the engine is cold, the transmission

shifts gears at higher revs. This allows the cat-

alytic converter to reach normal operating tem-

perature more quickly, with less exhaust emis-

sions.

Adaptive system

The gearbox is controlled by what is known as

an adaptive system. The system continually

monitors how the gearbox is behaving and

senses every gear change for optimum change

quality.

Lock-up function The gears have a lock-up function (locked

gears), which gives better engine braking and

lower fuel consumption.

Safety systems

Cars with an automatic gearbox have special

safety systems:

Keylock To remove the ignition key, the gear selector

must be in the P position. The key is locked in

all other positions.

Parking position (P) Stationary car with engine running:

Keep your foot on the brake pedal when

moving the gear selector to another posi-

tion.

Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking

position (P position) To be able to move the gear selector from the

P position to other gear positions, the ignition

key must be in position I or II and the brake

pedal must be depressed.

Neutral position (N position) To be able to move the gear selector from the

N position to other gear positions, the ignition

key must be in position I or II and the brake

pedal must be depressed.

1 Only applies to Geartronic.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 123

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

All-wheel drive AWD*

06

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

All-wheel drive is always engaged

All-wheel drive means that all four road wheels

are driven at the same time. The power is auto-

matically distributed between the front and rear

wheels. An electronically controlled clutch sys-

tem distributes the power to the pair of wheels

that grips best. This provides the best traction

and prevents wheel spin.

Under normal driving conditions, the majority

of power is transmitted to the front wheels.

All-wheel drive improves driving safety in rain,

snow and icy conditions.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 124

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Brake system

06

125

Brake servo

If the car is rolling or is being towed with the

engine turned off, the brake pedal must be

pressed about five times harder than when the

engine is running. If the brake pedal is

depressed when the engine is started, you will

feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to

the brake servo becoming active. This may be

more noticeable if the car has Emergency

Brake Assistance (EBA).

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engine is running.

NOTE

If braking with the engine switched off, press the brake pedal sharply once, not repeatedly.

Brake circuits

This symbol illuminates if a brake

circuit is not working.

If a fault should occur in one of the

circuits, it is still possible to brake

the car. The brake pedal will travel further and

may feel softer than normal. Harder pressure

on the pedal is needed to produce the normal

braking effect.

Dampness can affect braking

characteristics Brake components become wet when the car

is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water

or when the car is washed. This may alter brake

pad friction characteristics so that there is a

delay before braking effect is noticed.

Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time

if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy

snow, as well as after setting off in very damp

or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads

and dries off any water. This precaution is also

recommended before parking the car for a long

period in such weather conditions.

If the brakes are used heavily When driving in the Alps or other roads with

similar characteristics, the car's brakes are

heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not

being depressed especially hard.

Because speed is often low, the brakes are not

cooled as effectively as when driving on flat

roads at higher speed.

So as not to overload the brakes, shift down

when driving downhill instead of using the foot

brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as

you would use driving uphill. This uses engine

braking more efficiently so the foot brake is

only required for brief periods.

Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an

additional load on the car's brakes.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

The ABS system (Anti-lock Braking

System) is designed so that the

wheels do not lock when braking.

This retains the best possible

steering response when braking.

This improves your ability to swerve to avoid

obstacles. The ABS system does not increase

your total braking capacity. However, as the

driver you have increased ability to steer and

thus better control over the car, which in turn

increases safety.

After the engine has started and has reached a

speed of about about 20 km/h, a short self-test

can be both heard and felt. When the ABS sys-

tem functions, you can hear and feel pulses in

the brake pedal. This is completely normal.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 125

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Brake system

06

126

NOTE

You must depress the brake pedal fully to take maximum advantage of the ABS sys- tem.

Do not release the pedal when you hear and feel the ABS pulses.

Practice braking with the ABS system at a suitable location such as a skid pan to prac- tice skidding.

The ABS symbol illuminates:

for approximately two seconds during the system test when the car is started.

if the ABS system has shut down due to a fault.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illu- minate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake system. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop and have the brake system checked.

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

Electronic brake force distribution system EBD

The Electronic Brakeforce Distribution system

(EBD) is an integrated part of the ABS system.

The EBD system controls the brake force to the

rear wheels so that the best possible braking

force is always available. Pulses will be heard

and felt through the brake pedal when the sys-

tem regulates brake force.

Emergency Brake Assistance EBA

The Emergency Brake Assistance function

(EBA) is integrated in the DSTC system and is

designed to provide immediate maximum

brake force whenever rapid braking is neces-

sary. The system detects the need for heavier

braking by registering how quickly the brake

pedal is applied.

The EBA function is active at all speeds. For

safety reasons, it cannot be switched off.

When the EBA function is activated, the brake

pedal sinks while maximum braking force is

applied. Continue braking without releasing

the brake pedal. The EBA function disengages

when the pressure on the brake pedal is

released.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 126

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Stability and traction control system*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127

General

The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control

system (STC/DSTC) improves the car's trac-

tion and helps the driver to avoid skidding.

A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking

or acceleration when the system is in action.

The car may accelerate slower than expected

when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

The car is equipped with either STC or DSTC

depending on market. The table shows the

integral functions of the respective systems.

Function/sys- tem

STC DSTC

Active Yaw Control X

Spin Control X X

Traction control

system

X X

Active Yaw Control The function limits the driving and brake force

of the wheels individually in order to stabilise

the car.

Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from

spinning against the road surface during accel-

eration.

Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans-

fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-

ning to the one that is not.

Reduced operation

G 02

85 11

Thumbwheel

RESET button

System operation during skidding and accel-

eration can be partially deactivated.

Operation during skidding is then delayed and

so allows more skidding which provides

greater freedom for dynamic driving. Traction

in deep snow or sand is improved at the same

time as acceleration is no longer limited.

Operation Turn the thumbwheel (1) until the STC/

DSTC menu appears.

DSTC ON means that the system function is

unchanged.

DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that sys-

tem operation is reduced.

Press and hold RESET (2) until the STC/

DSTC menu is changed.

At the same time the symbol illuminates as

a reminder that the system has been reduced.

The system remains reduced until the engine is

next started.

WARNING

Suppressing system function may alter the driving characteristics of the car.

NOTE

DSTC ON is shown for several seconds in the display each time the engine is started.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 127

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Stability and traction control system*

06

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Messages in the display

TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY

OFF means that the system has been tempo-

rarily reduced due to excessive brake tempera-

ture.

The function is reactivated automatically when

the brakes have cooled.

ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system

disabled due to a fault.

Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine.

If the message remains when the engine is restarted, drive to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol for STC/DSTC The symbol has different meanings

depending on how it is shown.

The symbol illuminates and goes out

again after approx. 2 seconds Indicates system check when the engine is

started.

The symbol flashes Indicates that the system is operating.

The symbol illuminates and stays lit ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED is shown in

the display at the same time.

Fault indicator in STC/DSTC system:

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine.

2. Restart the car.

If the warning symbol goes out, the fault was temporary and it is not necessary to visit a workshop.

If the warning symbol remains lit, drive to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked.

The symbol illuminates and stays lit DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF is shown in the

display at the same time.

Reminds that the STC/DSTC system has been

reduced.

Symbol for Warning The symbol illuminates with a con-

stant yellow glow.

TRACTION CONTROL

TEMPORARILY OFF is shown in

the display at the same time.

Indicates that the system has been temporarily

reduced due to excessive brake temperature.

Automatic reactivation of the function takes place when the brake temperature has returned to normal.

WARNING

Under normal driving conditions, the STC/ DSTC system improves the car's road safety, but this should not be taken as a reason to increase speed.

Always follow the usual precautions for safe cornering and driving on slippery road sur- faces.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 128

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Active chassis FOUR-C*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129

General information on the Active chassis - FOUR-C

Switch in centre console for

FOUR-C

The car is equipped with an

extremely advanced active

chassis system Continuously

Controlled Chassis Concept

that is regulated electronically. The functions of

the system are based on a number of sensors

that continually monitor the car's movements

and reactions, such as vertical and lateral

acceleration, vehicle speed and wheel move-

ments.

The FOUR-C control unit analyses data from

the sensors and performs the necessary shock

absorber setting adjustments up to 500 times

per second. This results in extremely fast and

accurate individual shock absorber control.

This contributes to variations in chassis cha-

racteristics.

Chassis characteristics can be modified at any

time while driving, when the nature of the road

changes or when you desire a change in driving

style. This change occurs in a matter of milli-

seconds.

Comfort Comfort mode adjusts the chassis setting so

that the body is insulated from uneven sections

of the road surface, which allows for better

"glide". Shock absorption is softer and body

movements are minimal. This setting is recom-

mended for long-distance driving or driving on

slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition is switched off in Comfort

setting, the chassis will resume the same mode

when the car is re-started.

Sport In Sport mode, steering responses are quicker

than in Comfort mode. Shock absorption is

harder and the body follows the road in order

to reduce rolling during fast cornering. The car

feels sportier.

When the ignition is switched off in Sport set-

ting, the chassis will resume the same mode

when the car is re-started.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 129

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Parking assistance*

06

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General 1

G 02

02 94

Parking assistance front and rear.

Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.

A signal indicates the distance to a detected

object.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking. The sensors have blind spots where objects cannot be detected. Be aware of children and animals near the car

Variants Parking assistance is available in two variants:

Rear only

Both front and rear.

Function The system is switched on automatically when

the car is started at which point the lamp in the

switch for parking assistance illuminates. The

display shows the text message PARK

ASSIST ACTIVE if reverse gear is engaged or

if the front sensors detect an object.

Parking assistance is active at speeds below

15 km/h. The system is deactivated at higher

speeds. When the speed is below 10 km/h the

system is reactivated.

The frequency of the signal increases as you

come closer to an object in front of or behind

the car. If the volume of another audio source

from the audio system is high, then this is auto-

matically lowered.

The tone becomes constant at a distance of

about 30 cm. If there are objects within this

distance behind or in front of the car, the signal

alternates between left and right-hand speak-

ers.

Rear parking assistance The distance covered to the rear of the car is

about 1.5 m. Rear parking assistance is acti-

vated when reverse gear is engaged. The sig-

nal comes from the rear loudspeakers.

The system must be deactivated when revers-

ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar

or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier

would trigger the sensors.

Rear parking assistance is deactivated auto-

matically when towing a trailer if a Volvo gen-

uine trailer cable is used.

Front parking assistance The distance covered to the front of the car is

about 0.8 metres. The signal comes from the

front loudspeakers.

Front parking assistance cannot be combined

with extra lights because the sensors are affec-

ted by the extra lights.

Fault indicator If the yellow warning symbol illu-

minates and the display shows

PARK ASSIST SERVICE

REQUIRED then parking assis-

tance is disengaged.

1 Depending on the market, the Parking assistance system may be either Standard, Option or Accessory.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 130

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Parking assistance*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Off/On G

02 71

04

Button position in the row may vary.

Parking assistance can be deactivated with the

button in the switch panel. The lamp in the

switch goes out. Parking assistance is

switched on again with the switch and the lamp

illuminates.

Cleaning the sensors

G 02

69 46

Parking assistance sensors.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to

ensure that they work properly. Clean them

with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 131

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

06

132

Start assistance

Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged

and the engine does not start. Do not tow the

car to bump start it, see page 134.

IMPORTANT

Bump starting the car can damage the cat- alytic converter.

Towing

Find out the highest legal speed for towing

before towing the car.

The car must always be towed facing forward.

1. Unlock the steering wheel lock so that the

car can be steered.

2. For the driver of the towing vehicle: Drive

gently.

For the driver of the vehicle being towed:

Keep the towline taut by holding your foot

gently pressed on the brake pedal in order

to avoid unnecessary jerking.

WARNING

The steering lock must be unlocked before towing.

The ignition key must be in position II.

Never remove the ignition key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off. The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox Move gear lever into neutral and release

the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Move the gear selector to position N and

release the parking brake.

Cars with automatic gearbox must not be

towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than

80 km.

Towing eye Before towing the towing eye must be bolted

securely onto the bumper. The socket and

cover for the towing eye are on the right-hand

side of each bumper.

The towing eye is in the tool kit in the cargo

area.

A

B C

G 02

80 91

Towing eye, front

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 132

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

06

133

A

B

C

G 02

80 93

Towing eye, rear

Proceed as follows:

1. Release the cover 1 (A) by carefully prizing

in the groove with a coin for example.

2. Screw the towing eye (B) securely into

place up to the flange (C). You can use a

wheel wrench.

To screw in the rear towing eye, you must

first remove a plastic bolt from the bracket

for the rear towing eye. Use the wheel

wrench from the tool kit to unscrew the

plastic bolt. Refit the plastic bolt after use.

After use, unscrew the towing eye and refit the cover.

NOTE

On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar. For this reason, it is advisable to always store the detachable towbar in the car.

Recovery

The car must always be towed with the wheels

rolling forward.

WARNING

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for recovering the car. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

1 Cover opening procedure may vary.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 133

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Start assistance

06

134

Starting with a donor battery

G 02

02 98

If for some reason the battery in your car is dis-

charged, you can "borrow" current from a

spare battery or another car's battery to start

the engine. Always check that the clamps are

fastened properly to prevent sparking during

the start attempt.

To avoid the risk of explosion, we recommend

you do exactly as follows.

1. Turn the ignition key to position 0.

2. Ensure that the other battery is 12 volt.

3. If the booster battery is in another car, stop

the engine of that car and make sure the

cars are not touching.

4. Connect the red cable between the

booster battery positive terminal (1+) and

the red connection in the engine compart-

ment (2+). Attach the clamp to the contact

point located beneath a small black cover

with a plus sign which is integrated in the

fuse box cover.

5. Connect one clamp of the black cable to

the negative terminal of the booster battery

(3).

6. Connect the other clamp of the black cable

to the lifting eye on the car's engine (4).

7. Start the engine of the "booster car". Let

the engine run a few minutes at a speed

slightly higher than idle, 1500 rpm.

8. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat-

tery.

Remove the clamps in reverse order.

NOTE

Do not remove the clamps during the start attempt (risk of spark build-up).

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical atten- tion immediately.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 134

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Driving with a trailer

06

135

General

The car's towing bracket must be of an

approved type. Your Volvo dealer can advise

you as to which towing bracket to use.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket follows the specified maximum towball load.

Increase tyre pressure so that it corre- sponds to the pressure for full load. See the tyre pressure table!

Clean the towing bracket regularly and

grease the towball 1 and all moving parts to prevent unnecessary wear.

Do not drive with a heavy trailer when your car is brand new! Wait until it has driven at least 1000 km.

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.

The engine and gearbox can overheat if the car is driven with a heavy load in hot weather. The temperature gauge in the combined instrument panel goes into the red zone when the car overheats. Stop and let the engine idle a few minutes.

If the car overheats, the air conditioning system can be temporarily switched off.

The gearbox reacts with a built-in protec- tion function if the car overheats. See the message in the display!

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

In the interests of safety, you should restrict speed to a maximum of 80 km/h, even if the laws of certain countries allow for higher speeds.

If you park with a trailer, apply the parking brake first, and then move the gear selector into position P (automatic gearbox) or select a gear (manual gearbox). If you park on a steep hill, put chocks under the wheels.

Avoid driving on inclines exceeding 12% if the trailer weight exceeds 1200 kg. Do not drive with a trailer at all on inclines exceed- ing 15%.

Trailer weights

For information on permitted trailer weights,

see page 259.

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

Driving with trailer automatic gearbox

When parking on hills, apply the parking brake before moving the gear selector to P. When starting on a hill, first put the gear selector in drive and then release the park- ing brake.

Select a low gear in the gearbox when driv- ing on steep inclines or when driving slowly. This prevents the gearbox from upshifting if you have an automatic gear- box. The gearbox oil will be cooler.

If you have a Geartronic gearbox, do not use a higher manual gear than the engine

1 Does not apply to the ball if using a stabiliser hitch.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 135

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Driving with a trailer

06

136

can "handle". It is not always economical to drive in high gears.

NOTE

Some models require an oil cooler for the automatic gearbox when driving with a trailer. Check with your nearest Volvo dealer as to what applies to your car if you have a retrofitted towbar.

Levelling

If your car is equipped with automatic levelling,

the rear suspension always retains the correct

ride height regardless of load. When the car is

stationary, the rear suspension sinks. This is

completely normal. When starting with a load,

the level is pumped up after a certain distance.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 136

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Towing equipment*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137

Towbar

If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,

the towball mounting instructions must be fol-

lowed carefully, see page 139.

WARNING

If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:

Follow the assembly instructions for the towball section carefully.

The towball section must be locked with the key before setting off.

Check that the indicator window shows green.

Important checks

The towball section's towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.

NOTE

If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- ball.

Storing the towball section

G 03

11 20

Towball section storage location

IMPORTANT

Always remove the towball section after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.

Trailer cable

G 01

45 89

An adapter is required if the car's towing

bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has

7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved

by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag

on the ground.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 137

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Towing equipment*

06

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Specifications

G 02

66 82 G

02 67

01

G 02

67 02

Dimensions for mounting points (mm)

A B C D E F G

Fixed towbar standard 1058

83

1083 542 122 50

305 Fixed towbar with Nivomat 91

Detachable towbar standard 1069

94 316

Detachable towbar with Nivomat 100

1 Side member

2 Ball centre

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 138

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139

Fitting the towball

G 01

73 17

1. Remove the protective cover by first press-

ing in the catch and then pulling the

cover straight back .

G 02

03 01

2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the

unlocked position by turning the key clock-

wise.

G 02

03 02

3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows

red. If the window does not show red,

press in (1) and turn the locking wheel anti-

clockwise (2) until you hear a click.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 139

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 02

03 04

4. Insert the towball section until you hear a

click.

G 02

03 06

5. Check that the indicator window shows

green.

G 02

03 07

6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-

tion. Remove the key from the lock.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 140

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

G 02

03 09

7. Check that the towball section is secure by

pulling it up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towball section is not fitted correctly then it must be removed and refitted in accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towball section should be clean and dry.

G 02

03 10

8. Safety cable.

WARNING

The trailer's safety cable must be attached onto the attachment on the towbar.

Removing the towball

G 02

03 01

1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the

unlocked position.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 141

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 02

03 12

2. Push in the locking wheel (1) and turn it

anticlockwise (2) until you hear a click.

G 02

03 14

3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it

comes to a stop. Hold it in this position

while pulling the towball rearward and

upward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar's loose towball safely if it is stored in the car, see page 137

G 01

73 18

4. Push on the protective cover.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 142

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Load on the roof

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143

General

The load capacity is affected by extra acces-

sories mounted on the car, such as load carri-

ers, space box and towbar, as well as the load

on the towball. The load capacity of the car is

reduced by the number of passengers and their

weight. For information on permitted weights,

see page 259.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

Load carriers*

G 02

73 40

To avoid damaging your car and to achieve the

best level of safety when driving, we recom-

mend that you only use load carriers that Volvo

has specially designed for your car.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Do not load lopsidedly. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

Remember that the car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics change if you have a load on the roof.

Keep in mind that the car's wind resistance and fuel consumption increase in propor- tion to the size of the load.

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.

Remove the load carrier when it is not in use. This reduces wind resistance and fuel consumption.

WARNING

Load no more than 100 kg on the roof, including the load carriers and any space box.

The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads.

Fitting load carriers

G 02

73 47

1. Make sure that the load carrier is fitted in

the right direction (see the marking on the

decal under the cover).

2. Fit the guide pins into the guide holes (1).

3. Carefully lower the bracket on the other

side to the roof.

4. Screw the knob up a bit.

5. Press the knob against the roof bracket

and catch the hook in the roof bracket

under the roof rail.

6. Screw the load carrier in place.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 143

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Load on the roof

06

144

7. Fit the guide pins of the other brackets into

the guide holes.

8. Screw the load carrier in place.

9. Check that the hook is properly secured in

the roof bracket.

10. Tighten the knobs alternately until the car-

rier feels secure.

11. Replace the cover.

12. Check that the roof rack is properly

secured.

NOTE

Check the knobs regularly to see that they are properly tightened.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 144

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

145

Correct light pattern for left or right- hand traffic

G 02

03 17

Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.

Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.

So as not to dazzle oncoming drivers, the

headlamp beam pattern can be altered by

masking the headlamps. The quality of the

beam pattern may not be as good.

Headlamp masking

Copy the templates and transfer the pattern to

a self-adhesive, waterproof material such as

opaque tape or the like.

The mask is positioned using the dot (5) in the

headlamp lens as a reference point. The refer-

ence measurement (X) indicates the distance

from the dot (5) to the corner of the mask,

marked with an arrow.

After copying the templates located on the next

page, check the measurements so that the ref-

erence measurements cover enough of the

beam pattern.

Adjusting headlamp pattern for Active Bi-

Xenon Lights ABL see page 52.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 145

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

146

Halogen headlamps

X X X X

3 41 2

G 02

85 59

Location of halogen headlamp masks, 1 and 2 = LHD variant, 3 and 4 = RHD variant

LHD variant

Copy templates 1 and 2. Check the measure-

ments to ensure they are correct. Transfer the

template to a self-adhesive, waterproof mate-

rial and cut it out.

Reference measurements Template 1: (3) = 70 mm, (4) = 40 mm.

Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (5): 13 mm.

Template 2: (6) = 55 mm, (7) = 40 mm.

Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (8): 18 mm.

RHD variant

Copy templates 3 and 4. Check the measure-

ments to ensure they are correct. Transfer the

template to a self-adhesive, waterproof mate-

rial and cut it out.

Reference measurements Template 3: (1) = 55 mm, (2) = 41 mm.

Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (5): 17 mm.

Template 4: (6) = 70 mm, (7) = 39 mm.

Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (8): 14 mm.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 146

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

147

G 02

85 63

Masking templates for halogen headlamps, LHD variant

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 147

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

148

G 02

85 64

Masking templates for halogen headlamps, RHD variant

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 148

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

149

Bi-Xenon headlamps

G 02

85 62

Location of Bi-Xenon headlamp masks, 1 and 2 = LHD variant, 3 and 4 = RHD variant

LHD variant

Copy templates 1 and 2. Check the measure-

ments to ensure they are correct. Transfer the

template to a self-adhesive, waterproof mate-

rial and cut it out.

Reference measurements Template 1: (3) = 56 mm, (4) = 43 mm.

Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (5): 29 mm.

Template 2: (6) = 56 mm, (7) = 42 mm.

Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (8): 6 mm.

RHD variant

Copy templates 3 and 4. Check the measure-

ments to ensure they are correct. Transfer the

template to a self-adhesive, waterproof mate-

rial and cut it out.

Reference measurements Template 3: (1) = 56 mm, (2) = 42 mm.

Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (5): 29 mm.

Template 4: (6) = 56 mm, (7) = 41 mm.

Distance (X) to dot in headlamp lens (8): 0 mm.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 149

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

150

G 02

85 63

Masking templates for Bi-Xenon headlamps, LHD variant

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 150

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

151

G 02

85 64

Masking templates for Bi-Xenon headlamps, RHD variant

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 151

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*

06

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 02

02 95

Rearview mirror with BLIS system.

BLIS camera

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

BLIS is an information system which indicates

whether there is another vehicle moving in the

same direction in the so-called "blind spot".

WARNING

The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.

A

B

G 02

02 96

Blind spots covered by BLIS Distance A = approx. 3 m Distance B = approx. 9,5 m

The system is designed to work most effec-

tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane

highways.

BLIS is based on digital camera technology.

The cameras (1) are located under the door

mirrors.

When a camera has detected a vehicle inside

the blind spot zone then an indicator lamp is lit

in the door panel (2). The light illuminates with

a constant glow to draw the driver's attention

to a vehicle in the blind spot.

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

BLIS also has an integrated function which

warns the driver if a fault should arise in the

system. If, for example, the system's cameras

are obscured then the BLIS indicator lamp

flashes and a message is shown in the instru-

ment panel display (table, see page 154). In

such cases, check and clean the lenses. If nec-

essary, the system can be switched off tem-

porarily by pressing the BLIS button (see

page 154).

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 152

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153

When BLIS operates

The system operates when the car is driven at

a speed above 10 km/h.

When you overtake another vehicle The system reacts if you overtake another vehi-

cle at a speed of up to 10 km/h faster than the

other vehicle.

When you are overtaken by another

vehicle The system reacts if you are overtaken by a

vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h faster than you

are travelling.

WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is revers- ing.

A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.

System function in daylight and darkness

Daylight In daylight the system reacts to the shape of

the surrounding vehicles. The system is

designed to detect motor vehicles such as

cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles

Darkness In darkness the system reacts to the head-

lamps of surrounding vehicles. If its head-

lamps are not switched on then the system

does not detect the vehicle. This means for

example that the system does not react to a

trailer without headlamps which is towed

behind a car or truck.

WARNING

The system does not react to bicycles or mopeds.

The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by intensive light or when driving in the dark when there are no light sources (e.g. street lighting or other vehicles). The system may then interpret the lack of light as if the cam- eras have been blocked.

In both cases a message is shown on the display.

When driving in such conditions system performance may be temporarily reduced (see the information on the next page).

When the text message disappears the sys- tem returns to full functionality.

The BLIS cameras have the same limitations as the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in heavy snowfall or thick fog for example.

Cleaning

In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-

era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be

cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.

Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not

scratched.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 153

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*

06

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.

Switching off and reactivating BLIS

G 02

69 55

BLIS is activated automatically each time the ignition is switched on. The indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times when the ignition is switched on.

The system can be switched off by press- ing the BLIS button in the switch panel in the centre console (see illustration above). The lamp in the button goes out when the system is switched off and a text message

is shown in the display in the instrument panel.

BLIS can be reactivated by pressing the button. A lamp in the button then illumi- nates, a new text message is shown in the display and the indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times. Press the READ button, see page 47, to clear the text mes- sage.

BLIS system messages

Text on the dis- play

Specification

BLIND-SPOT INFO

SYSTEM ON

BLIS system on

BLIND-SPOT

SYST SERVICE

REQUIRED

BLIS not functioning

BLIND-SPOT

SYST R CAMERA

BLOCKED

Right-hand camera

blocked

BLIND-SPOT

SYST L CAMERA

BLOCKED

Left-hand camera

blocked

BLIND-SPOT

SYST CAMERAS

BLOCKED

Both cameras

blocked

Text on the dis- play

Specification

BLIS REDUCED

FUNCTION

The BLIS camera is

disrupted by fog or

strong sunlight shin-

ing directly into the

camera. The camera

resets itself when

the environment has

returned to normal.

BLIND-SPOT INFO

SYSTEM OFF

BLIS system off

The messages above are only shown if the

ignition key is in position II (or if the engine is

running) and BLIS is active (i.e. if the driver has

not switched off the system).

Limitations

In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may

illuminate despite there being no other vehicle

within the blind spot.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 154

evastarck

06 Starting and driving

BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system.

In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text BLIS Serv. required.

Here are several examples of situations where

the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if

there is no other vehicle within the blind spot. G

01 81

76

Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

G 01

81 77

Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.

G 01

81 78

Low sun in the camera.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 155

evastarck

G 02

09 18

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General.................................................................................................. 158

Tyre pressure........................................................................................ 161

Warning triangle* and spare wheel....................................................... 163

Tyre pressure monitoring*..................................................................... 165

Changing wheels................................................................................... 167

Emergency puncture repair*................................................................. 169

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 156

evastarck

07 WHEELS AND TYRES

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 157

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

158

Driving characteristics and tyres

The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha-

racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre

pressure and speed rating are important for

how the car performs.

When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the

same type and dimensions, and preferably also

the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.

Follow the recommended tyre pressures

specified on the tyre pressure label, see

page 161.

Designation of dimensions

The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.

Example of designation:

205/55R16 91 W.

205 Section width (mm)

55 Ratio between section height and

width (%)

R Radial ply

16 Rim diameter in inches (")

91 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)

W Speed rating for maximum permit-

ted speed (in this case 270 km/h).

Speed ratings

The car is approved as a whole, which means

that dimensions and speed ratings must not

differ from those specified on the vehicle reg-

istration document. The only exception to

these conditions is winter tyres (both those

with metal studs and those without). If such a

tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster

than the speed rating of the tyre (for example,

class Q can be driven at a maximum of

160 km/h).

Remember that traffic regulations determine

how fast a car can be driven, not the speed

class of the tyres.

Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)

T 190 km/h

H 210 km/h

V 240 km/h

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a

few years they begin to

harden at the same time as

the friction capacity/charac-

teristics gradually deteriorate.

For this reason, aim to get as

fresh tyres as possible when

you replace them. This is especially important

with regard to winter tyres. The week and year

of manufacture, the tyre's DOT marking

(Department of Transportation), are stated with

four digits, for example 1502. The tyre in the

illustration was manufactured in week 15 of

2002.

Tyre age All tyres older than six years should be checked

by an expert even if they seem undamaged.

The reason for this is that tyres age and decom-

pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used.

The function can therefore be affected due to

the tyre's constituent materials being broken

down. In such a case the tyre should then not

be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter

tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples

of external signs which indicate that the tyre is

unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.

The age of the tyre can be determined by the

DOT marking, see illustration above.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 158

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

159

More even wear and maintenance

G 02

03 23

The correct tyre pressure results in more even

wear, see page 162. Driving style, tyre pres-

sure, climate and road condition affect how

quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-

ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear

patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can

be switched with each other. A suitable dis-

tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km

and then at 10000 km intervals. Contact an

authorised Volvo workshop if you are uncertain

about tread depth.

Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging

up, and not standing up.

WARNING

A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control of the car.

Tyres with tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless

bands across the width of the tread. On the

side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear

Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down

to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height

with the tread wear indicators. Change to new

tyres as soon as possible. Remember that

tyres with little tread depth provide very poor

grip in rain and snow.

Winter tyres

Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific

winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are

dependent on engine variant. When driving on

winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four

wheels.

NOTE

Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for

500 1000 km so the studs settle properly into

the tyre. This gives the tyre, and especially the

studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-

peratures place considerably higher demands

on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore

recommended not to drive on winter tyres that

have a tread depth of less than four millimetres.

Snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front

wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive

cars.

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow

chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this

wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space

between the brake discs and the wheels is too

small.

IMPORTANT

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. Consult an author- ised Volvo workshop

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 159

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

160

Locking wheel bolts Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu-

minium and steel rims. If steel rims with locking

wheel bolts are used in combination with wheel

covers then the locking wheel bolts must be

fitted furthest from the air valve. Otherwise the

wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.

Summer and winter wheels

G 02

03 25

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation

When summer and winter wheels are changed

the wheels should be marked with which side

of the car they were mounted on, for example

L for left and R for right.

Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed

to only turn in one direction have the direction

of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must

always rotate in the same direction throughout

its lifespan.

Tyres should only be switched between front

and rear positions, never between left and

right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyre is

mounted incorrectly, the car's braking charac-

teristics and capacity to force rain, snow and

slush out of the way are adversely affected.

Tyres with the greatest tread depth should

always be fitted to the rear of the car (to

decrease the risk of skidding).

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if you

are uncertain about tread depth.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 160

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

07

161

Recommended tyre pressure

G 02

07 91

The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side

door pillar (between frame and rear door)

shows which pressures the tyres should have

at different loads and speed conditions.

Stated on the decal:

Tyre pressures for the car's recommended wheel size

ECO pressure

Spare wheel pressure (Temporary Spare).

Checking the tyre pressure Check the tyre pressure regularly.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature. Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.

Correct tyre pressures are specified in the tyre

pressure table see page 162. The specified

tyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold

tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-

ture as the ambient temperature.)

Even after several kilometres of driving, the

tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So

air must not be released if the pressure is

checked when the tyres are warm. While the

pressure must be increased if it is too low.

Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-

sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the

car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre

pressure that is too low can also result in the

tyres overheating and disintegrating. For infor-

mation on the correct tyre pressure, refer to the

tyre pressure table.

Fuel economy, ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre

pressure for full load is recommended in order

to obtain optimum fuel economy.

Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road

noise and steering characteristics.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 161

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

07

162

Tyre pressure table

Variant Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1-3 persons Max. load

Front (kPa A) Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa)

T5 205/55R16

215/55R16

225/45R17

235/40R18

0 160 220 220 260 260

160 + 260 260 280 280

0 160 260 B 260B 260B 260B

Others 195/65R15

205/55R16

215/55R16

225/45R17

235/40R18

0 160 220 220 260 260

160 + 250 250 280 280

0 160 260B 260B 260B 260B

Spare wheel,

Temp. spare

T125/80R17 0 80 420 420 420 420

A In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa (260 kPa = 2.60 bar) B ECO pressure, see page 161

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 162

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163

Warning triangle

G 02

72 24

Follow the warning triangle regulations of the

country you are in.

Use the warning triangle as follows:

1. Turn both attachment screws to the verti-

cal position.

2. Carefully remove the warning triangle

case.

3. Remove the warning triangle from its

case (A).

4. Fold out the four support legs on the warn-

ing triangle.

5. Fold out both red sides of the warning tri-

angle. Place the warning triangle in a loca-

tion that is appropriate for the traffic

situation.

After use Pack everything in reverse order.

Make sure the warning triangle and its case are

properly secured in the boot lid.

Spare wheel, tools and jack

G 02

72 01

1. Spare wheel*

2. Mounting

3. Tool kit* with towing eye

4. Jack*

The spare wheel and jack and tool kit are

located under the floor of the cargo area.

Remove the spare wheel as follows:

1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.

2. Remove the jack and tool kit.

3. Unscrew the spare wheel and lift it out.

If the car is equipped with a carrier bag

holder: 1. Turn the two clips located at the rear corner

of the mat 90 degrees.

2. Pull the front of the floor mat back towards

the boot lid opening.

3. Lift the mat slightly and turn 90 degress to

lift it out.

4. Lift the mat out of the cargo area.

5. Unscrew the spare wheel and lift it out.

Return and secure everything in reverse order.

Make sure that the spare wheel is securely in

place and that the jack and tool kit are properly

secured.

Tools - returning into place The tools and jack* must be returned to their

correct places after use. The jack must be

cranked to the correct position, see the pre-

ceding illustration, in order to have space.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 163

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel

07

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

Tools and jack must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

Spare wheel, "Temporary spare"*

The spare wheel "Temporary Spare" should

only be used for the short time it takes to repair

or replace the normal tyre.

By law, it is only legal to use the spare wheel/

tyre temporarily in connection with damage to

a tyre. A wheel/tyre of this type should be

replaced with a normal wheel/tyre as soon as

possible.

Remember also that this tyre combined with

the normal tyres will affect driving characteris-

tics. The maximum speed with the "Temporary

Spare" - spare wheel is therefore 80 km/h.

IMPORTANT

Only use the car's own genuine spare wheel! Tyres with other dimensions may cause damage to your car. Only one spare wheel may be used at a time.

First aid*

A case with first aid equipment is located in the

cargo area.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 164

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure monitoring*

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

General

The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System warns

the driver when the pressure is too low in one

or more of the car's tyres. It uses sensors

located inside the air valve in each wheel.

When the car is driven at about 40 km/h the

system detects the tyre pressure. If the pres-

sure is too low then a warning lamp on the

instrument panel illuminates and a message is

shown on the display.

Always check the system after changing a

wheel in order to ensure that replacement

wheels work with the system.

For information on correct tyre pressures, see

page 162.

The system does not replace normal tyre main-

tenance.

IMPORTANT

If a fault should arise in the tyre pressure system a warning lamp on the instrument panel will illuminate. The message TYRE PRESS. SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be shown. This can be for various reasons, e.g. fitting a wheel not equipped with a sen- sor adapted for Volvo's tyre pressure moni- toring system.

Adjusting tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure monitoring can be adjusted in

order to follow Volvo's tyre pressure recom-

mendations, when driving with a heavy load for

example.

NOTE

The engine must not be running.

1. Inflate the tyres to the required pressure.

2. Select key position I or II.

3. Turn the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk

switch until the text TYRE PRESSURE

CALIBRATION is shown on the display.

4. Press and hold the RESET button until the

text TYRE PRESSURE CALIBRATED is

shown in the display.

Rectifying low tyre pressure When the message LOW TYRE PRESS.

CHECK TYRES is shown on the display:

1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres.

2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure.

3. Drive the car for at least 1 minute in total at

a minimum of 40 km/h and check that the

message disappears.

Deactivating tyre pressure monitoring

NOTE

The engine must not be running.

1. Key position I or II.

2. Turn the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk

switch until the text TYRE PRESS. SYST

ON is shown on the display.

3. Press and hold the RESET button until the

text TYRE PRESS. SYST OFF is shown.

To reactivate the system, repeat the same

steps 1-3, so that TYRE PRESS. SYST ON is

shown.

Recommendations Only factory fitted wheels are equipped with

TPMS sensors in the valves.

The temporary spare wheel does not have this sensor.

If wheels without TPMS sensors are used then TYRE PRESS SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be shown in the display every time the car is driven faster than 40 km/h for more than 10 minutes.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 165

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure monitoring*

07

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are fitted to all wheels on the car (summer and winter wheels).

Volvo recommends that sensors are not moved between different wheels.

WARNING

When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS, hold the nozzle of the pump directly against the valve to avoid damaging the valve.

Driveable punctured tyres*

If Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST) have

been selected then the car is also equipped

with TPMS.

This type of tyre has a specially reinforced side

wall that makes continued driving possible

despite the tyre losing some air. These tyres

are fitted on a special rim. (Normal tyres can

also be fitted to this rim).

If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yel-

low TPMS lamp on the instrument panel illu-

minates and a message is shown in the text

panel. If this occurs, reduce speed to max.

80 km/h. The tyre must be replaced as soon as

possible.

Drive carefully, in some cases it can be difficult

to see which tyre is faulty. In order to establish

which tyre needs attention, check all four tyres.

WARNING

SST tyres should only be fitted by individu- als with expertise on SST tyres.

SST tyres must only be fitted together with TPMS.

After a fault message on low tyre pressure has been shown, do not drive faster than 80 km/h.

Maximum driving distance to tyre change is 80 km.

Avoid hard driving.

SST tyres must be replaced if they are dam- aged or punctured.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 166

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167

Removing wheels

G 02

03 31

Remember to set out the warning triangle if you

must change a wheel in a trafficked area. The

spare wheel* is under the plastic trough in the

cargo area.

1. Apply the parking brake and engage 1st

gear on cars with manual gearbox posi-

tion P on cars with automatic gearbox.

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

2. Place chocks in front of and behind the

wheels which will remain on the ground.

Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.

G 02

03 32

3. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel

covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the

end of the wheel wrench*, or pull it off by

hand.

4. Loosen the wheel nuts -1 turn anticlock-

wise with the wheel wrench.

G 02

73 24

WARNING

Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack- ing point and the jack.

5. There are two jacking points on each side

of the car. There is a recess in the plastic

cover at each point. Crank the foot of the

jack* down so it is pressed squarely on the

ground. Check that the jack sits in the

anchorage as illustrated and that the foot

is positioned vertically under the anchor-

age.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 167

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

07

168

6. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.

Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the

wheel.

Fitting the wheel

G 02

73 10

1. Clean the contract surfaces on the wheel

and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Screw in the wheel bolts.

3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot

rotate.

4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is

important that the wheel nuts are tightened

properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the

torque with a torque wrench.

5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).

G 02

73 09

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.

Ensure that passengers wait with the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between them and the road.

IMPORTANT

If TPMS is specified then the tyres must be calibrated after fitting, see see page 165.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 168

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169

General

The emergency puncture repair kit is used to

seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust

the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor

and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as

a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle

must be replaced before its expiration date and

after use.

The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-

tured in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

NOTE

The jack is an option on cars equipped with emergency puncture repair kit.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited

capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in

the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency

puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,

cracks or similar damage.

12 V sockets for connecting the compressor

are located by the centre console in the front,

by the rear seat and in the cargo area. Choose

the electrical socket that is nearest the punc-

tured tyre.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi- mum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Taking out the emergency puncture

repair kit The emergency puncture repair kit, with com-

pressor and tools, is located under the floor in

the cargo area.

1. Fold away the rear edge of the floor mat,

forward from the back.

2. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.

Overview

G 02

04 00

Label, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 169

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Sealing punctured tyres

G 01

97 23

For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.

1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture

repair kit.

2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted

speed and affix it to the steering wheel.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and

locate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro- ken when the bottle is screwed in.

4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the

bottle's stopper.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Screw the bottle into its holder.

6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw

in the air hose valve connection to the bot-

tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and

start the car.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30seconds.

8. Flick the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre.

10. Switch off the compressor to check the

pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 170

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is

3.5 bar.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the

cable from the 12 V socket.

12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit

the valve cap.

13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3

km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that

the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

Rechecking the repair and pressure 1. Reconnect the equipment.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure

gauge.

3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf-

ficiently sealed. The journey should not be

continued. Contact a tyre centre.

4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,

the tyre must be inflated to the pressure

specified on the tyre pressure decal.

Release air using the pressure reducing

valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air

hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be replaced after use. Replacement must be performed by an authorised Volvo work- shop.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit

to the cargo area.

7. Drive to the nearest authorised Volvo work-

shop for the replacement/repair of the

damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that

the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi- mum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Inflating the tyres

The car's original tyres can be inflated by the

compressor.

1. The compressor must be switched off.

Make sure that the switch is in position 0

and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw

in the air hose valve connection to the bot-

tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V

sockets and start the car.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch

to position I.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 171

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on

the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using

the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-

sure is too high.)

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air

hose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

Changing the sealing fluid canister

Replace the bottle when the expiration date

has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-

mentally hazardous waste.

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

NOTE

Leave the container at a collection point for storing dangerous waste.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 172

evastarck

07 Wheels and tyres

07

173

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 173

evastarck

G 02

09 20

174

Cleaning................................................................................................ 176

Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 179

Rustproofing......................................................................................... 180

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 174

evastarck

08 CAR CARE

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 175

evastarck

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

176

Washing the car

Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Use

car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead to

corrosion.

Do not park the car in direct sunlight. Washing a car with hot paintwork can cause permanent paintwork damage. Wash the car in a car wash with waste water separator.

Thoroughly rinse dirt off the underbody of the car.

IMPORTANT

Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. When using a pressure washer: Make sure that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the car using a cold degreasing agent.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp when it has been switched on for a time.

Cleaning the wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,

as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,

impair the service life of wiper blades.

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Do not use any strong solvents.

Removing bird droppings Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork

as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain

chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork

very quickly. This discoloration can only be

removed by a specialist.

Chromed wheels

IMPORTANT

Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke- warm water.

Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick

way of washing the car, but it can never replace

a proper handwashing. The brushes of an auto-

matic car wash cannot reach everywhere.

IMPORTANT

Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is also more sensitive when it is new. For this reason, handwashing is recommended dur- ing the first few months with a new car.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 176

evastarck

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177

Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then

when driving long distances in rain or slush.

This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the

same thing after starting in very damp or cold

weather.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim

components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo

dealers is recommended for cleaning coloured

plastic parts, rubber and trim components

(such as glossy trim mouldings). When using

such a cleaning agent the instructions must be

followed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

Polishing and waxing

Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull

or to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it is

at least one year old. However, the car can be

waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax

the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you

begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt

and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or white

spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed

using fine rubbing paste designed for car paint-

work.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-

uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the

packaging carefully. Many preparations con-

tain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatment is not covered by Volvo warranty.

Cleaning door mirrors and front door windows with water-repellent coating*

Never use products such as car wax,

degreaser or similar on mirror/glass surfaces

as this could ruin their water-repellent proper-

ties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to damage

the glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when

removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.

There is natural wear of the water-repellent

coating.

NOTE

Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recom- mended in order to maintain the water- repellent properties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 177

evastarck

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

178

Cleaning the interior

Treating stains on fabric upholstery A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo

dealers, is recommended for cleaning the fab-

ric upholstery. Other chemicals can impair the

fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free and

approved in accordance with the Oeko-

Tex 100 standard.

The leather is refined and processed so that it

retains its natural characteristics. It is given a

protective coating, but regular cleaning is

required in order to maintain both characteris-

tics and appearance. Volvo offers a compre-

hensive product for the cleaning and treatment

of leather upholstery which, when used in

accordance with the instructions, preserves

the leather's protective coating.

After a period of use the natural appearance of

the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-

ing more or less on the surface texture of the

leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather

and shows that it is a natural product.

To achieve best results Volvo recommends

cleaning and application of the protective

cream once to four times per year (or more if

required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo's

Leather care product.

IMPORTANT

Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Note that materials with colour that runs when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.) may discolour the upholstery material.

Washing instructions for leather

upholstery 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened

sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular

movements.

3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the

stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the

stain. Do not rub.

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and

allow the leather to dry completely.

Protective treatment of leather

upholstery 1. Pour a small amount of the protective

cream on the felted cloth and massage in

a thin layer of cream with gentle circular

movements on the leather.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes

before use.

The leather has now been given improved pro-

tection against stains and improved UV pro-

tection.

Treating stains on interior plastic, metal

and wood parts A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo

dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior

parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains.

Never use strong stain removers.

Cleaning seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special

textile cleaning agent is available from your

Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry

before allowing it to retract.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 178

evastarck

08 Car care

Touching up paintwork

08

179

Paintwork

Paint is an important part of the car's rust-

proofing and should therefore be checked reg-

ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged

paintwork should be rectified immediately. The

most common types of paintwork damage are

stone chips, scratches, and stains on the

edges of wings and doors.

Colour code

G 02

03 46

Data plate.

It is important that the correct colour is used.

The colour code number (1) is shown on the

data plate, see page 256.

Stone chips and scratches

G 02

03 45

Before touching up paintwork, the car must be

clean and dry and at a temperature above

15 C.

Materials

Primer in a can

Paint in a can or touch-up pen

Brush

Masking tape.

Minor stone chips and scratches If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare

metal and there is an undamaged colour coat,

you can paint straight after cleaning the dam-

aged area.

If the stone chip has penetrated to the

bare metal 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the

damaged surface. Then remove the tape to

remove any loose paint.

2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine

brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a

brush once the primer is dry.

3. For scratches, proceed as above, but

mask around the damaged area to protect

the undamaged paintwork.

4. After a few days, polish the touched-up

areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount

of lapping paste.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 179

evastarck

08 Car care

Rustproofing

08

180

Inspection and maintenance

Your car has already received a thorough and

complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of

the body are made of galvanised sheet metal.

The underbody is protected by a wear-resis-

tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene-

trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the

members, cavities and closed sections.

Maintain the car's rustproofing.

Keep the car clean. Hose down the under- body. If using a pressure washer, keep the nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted sur- faces.

Regularly check and touch-up the rust- proofing treatment as necessary.

The car's rustproofing does not normally

require treatment for approximately 12 years.

After this period, it should be treated at three-

year intervals. If the car needs further treat-

ment, please contact an authorised Volvo

workshop.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 180

evastarck

08 Car care

08

181

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 181

evastarck

G 02

09 22

182

Volvo service......................................................................................... 184

Self-maintenance.................................................................................. 185

Bonnet and engine compartment......................................................... 186

Diesel.................................................................................................... 188

Oils and fluids....................................................................................... 189

Wiper blades......................................................................................... 193

Battery................................................................................................... 194

Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 196

Fuses..................................................................................................... 203

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 182

evastarck

09 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 183

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Volvo service09

184

Volvo service programme

Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly

test driven. It was checked again in accord-

ance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations

before it was handed over to you.

To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as pos-

sible, follow the Volvo service programme

specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Have an authorised Volvo workshop carry out

service and maintenance work. Volvo work-

shops have the personnel, special tools and

service literature to guarantee the highest qual-

ity of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Special service measures

Certain service measures which affect the car's

electrical system can only be performed using

electronic equipment specially developed for

your car. For this reason, always contact an

authorised Volvo workshop before beginning

or performing service work that affects the

electrical system.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 184

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Self-maintenance 09

185

Before starting work on the car

Battery Check that the battery cables are correctly

connected and tightened.

Never disconnect the battery when the engine

is running (e.g. if replacing the battery).

Never use a quick charger to charge the bat-

tery. The battery cables must be disconnected

when charging the battery.

The battery contains acid that is both corrosive

and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the

battery in an environmentally correct manner.

Let your Volvo dealer assist you.

WARNING

The car ignition system has very high volt- age!

The voltage in the ignition system is dan- gerous!

Do not touch spark plugs, ignition cables or the ignition coil when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on!

The ignition should be switched off when:

conducting engine tests

replacing parts in the ignition system, such as spark plugs, ignition coil, dis- tributor, ignition cables, etc.

Lifting the car

G 02

72 52

If the car is lifted with a workshop jack, it should

sit with the front edge on the engine support

arm. Do not damage the splashguard under the

engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so

that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always

use axle stands or the like.

If you lift the car using a two pillar workshop lift,

ensure that the front and rear lift arms are fixed

under the lifting points on the door sill. See

previous illustration.

Check regularly

Check the following at regular intervals, for

example, when refuelling:

Coolant The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank.

Engine oil The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Power steering fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Washer fluid The reservoir should be well filled. Use washer antifreeze at tempera- tures around freezing.

Brake and clutch fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

WARNING

Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 185

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Bonnet and engine compartment09

186

Opening the bonnet

G 02

72 53

Opening the bonnet, left-hand drive car.

G 02

72 54

Opening the bonnet, right-hand drive car.

To open the bonnet:

1. Pull the handle on the far left under the

dashboard. You will hear when the catch

releases.

2. Insert your hand under the centre of the

front edge of the bonnet and press the

safety catch to the right.

3. Open the bonnet.

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 186

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Bonnet and engine compartment 09

187

Engine compartment 1

G 02

72 75

Expansion tank, cooling system

Power steering fluid reservoir

Washer fluid reservoir

Engine oil dipstick

Radiator

Radiator fan

Engine oil filler pipe

a) Clutch/brake fluid reservoir (left-hand

drive car). b) Clutch/brake fluid reservoir

(right-hand drive car)

Relay/fuse box

Air filter. (The cover has a different design

depending on engine variant.)

Battery (in cargo area)

1 The appearance of the engine compartment may vary slightly due to engine variant. However, the components listed are in the same positions.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 187

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Diesel09

188

Fuel system

Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204

standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to con-

taminants such as high volumes of sulphur

particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from

a well-known producers. Never use diesel of

dubious quality.

At low temperatures (-40 C to -6 C), a paraffin

precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which

can lead to ignition problems. The major oil

companies produce a special winter-grade

diesel for temperatures around freezing. This

fuel is less viscous at low temperatures and

reduces the risk of paraffin precipitate.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is

reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When

refuelling, check that the area around the fuel

filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the

paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-

gent and water.

IMPORTANT

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard, see page 268.

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels which must not be used: special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel oil, RME 1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta- ble oil. These fuels do not fulfil the require- ments in accordance with Volvo recommen- dations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.

IMPORTANT

For model year 2006 or later the sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.

Empty tank No special procedures are required if the tank

runs dry. The fuel system is bled automatically

if the ignition switch is kept in position II for

approx. 60 seconds before the start attempt.

Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the

fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-

tion.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals

specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet

or if you suspect that the car has been filled

with contaminated fuel.

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 188

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

189

Engine compartment decal for oil grade.

G 02

16 28

IMPORTANT

Always use oil of the prescribed grade, see the engine compartment decal.

The engine will be damaged if lower grade oil is used or if the car is driven with the oil level too low.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is

permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-

ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a

higher grade than that specified on the decal,

see page 262.

Adverse driving conditions Check the oil level more frequently for long

journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer.

in mountainous regions.

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C

shorter driving distances (shorter than 10 km) at low temperatures (under 5 C).

This may result in abnormally high oil tempera-

ture or oil consumption.

Checking and changing the engine oil

and oil filter Change the oil and oil filter in accordance with

the intervals specified in the Service and War-

ranty Booklet.

IMPORTANT

When filling oil to top up a low oil level, the oil being filled must be of the same grade and viscosity as the oil in the engine.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied.

Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteris- tics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low

oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants

have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp

for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an

oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed

via the warning symbol in the centre of the

instrument unit as well as by display texts.

Certain models have both variants. Contact an

authorised Volvo dealer for more information.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 189

evastarck

Check the oil level frequently and change

at high speeds.

the oil regularly.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids09

190

Checking the oil level in a new car is especially

important before the first scheduled oil change.

The Service and Warranty Booklet specifies the

odometer readings for oil changes.

Volvo recommends checking the oil level every

2 500 km. The most accurate measurements

are made on a cold engine before starting. The

measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme-

diately after the engine is switched off. The

dipstick will indicate that the level is too low

because the oil has not had time to flow down

into the oil sump.

Checking the oil

G 02

03 36

The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick

Checking the oil in a cold engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking

the level.

2. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The

level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks.

If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by

topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until the oil

level is nearer the MAX than the MIN mark on

the dipstick, see page 262 and forward for

capacities.

Checking the oil in a warm engine 1. Park the car on a level surface, switch off

the engine and wait 10 15 minutes to

allow the oil time to run back to the sump.

2. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking

the level.

3. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The

level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks.

If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by

topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until the oil

level is nearer the MAX than the MIN mark on

the dipstick, see page 262 and forward for

capacities.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

IMPORTANT

Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con- sumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.

Washer fluid reservoir

G 02

72 43

Washer fluid reservoir

The windscreen and headlamp washers share

a common reservoir. See the capacities and

recommended fluid grade on page 264.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 190

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

191

Use washer fluid during the winter so that the

fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir and

hoses.

Tip: Clean the wiper blades when topping up

washer fluid. Mix the washer antifreeze and

water before filling the reservoir.

Coolant

G 02

72 76

Coolant reservoir.

Check the coolant regularly. The level must lie

between the MIN and MAX marks on the

expansion tank. Top up the coolant when the

level falls to the MIN mark.

See capacities and recommended grade for

fluids and oils on page 264.

When topping up the coolant, follow the

instructions on the packaging. It is important

that the mixture of coolant concentrate and

water is correct for the prevailing weather con-

ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk

of freezing increases with both too little and too

much coolant concentrate.

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

IMPORTANT

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.

When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High tempera- tures can occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head.

For capacities and for standards regarding

water quality, see the table under Fluids and

lubricants on page 264.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 191

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids09

192

Clutch and brake fluid reservoir

G 02

73 06

Location dependent on whether car is left or right- hand drive.

Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-

voir 1. The fluid level must be between the

MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly.

Change the brake fluid every other year or at

every other regular service.

See capacities and recommended grade for

fluids and oils on page 264.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

NOTE

The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, fre- quent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity.

Power steering fluid reservoir

ADD FULL

G 02

72 00

Check the level frequently. The fluid does not

require changing. The level must be between

the ADD and FULL marks.

See capacities and recommended grade for

fluids and oils on page 264.

NOTE

It is possible to steer if a fault should occur in the power steering system or if the car loses electrical power and requires towing. Bear in mind that steering will be more dif- ficult than normal and more force will be required to turn the steering wheel.

1 Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 192

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Wiper blades 09

193

Wiper blades

NOTE

Bear in mind that the wiper blade on the driver's side is longer than the one on the passenger side.

Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see

page 176.

IMPORTANT

Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the serv- ice life of the wiper blades.

Replacing windscreen wiper blades

1. Fold out the wiper arm and grasp the wiper

blade.

2. Press in the ribbed spring catch on the

wiper blade while lifting it off at the arm

extension.

3. Fit the new blade in reverse order and

check that it is properly secured.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 193

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Battery09

194

Battery care

The service life and function of the battery is

influenced by factors such as the number of

starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-

ditions and climatic conditions.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally correct manner as it con- tains lead.

WARNING

Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical atten- tion immediately.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly

Symbols on the battery

Use protective goggles

Further information in the

owner's manual.

Store the battery out of the

reach of children.

The battery contains corro-

sive acid.

Avoid sparks and naked

flames.

Risk of explosion.

Changing the battery

G 02

84 19

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 194

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Battery 09

195

Removing the battery 1. Switch off the ignition and remove the key.

2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any

electrical terminals. This allows time for the

information in the car's electrical system to

be stored in the control modules.

3. Undo the screws from the lock brace over

the battery and remove the brace.

4. Bend up the plastic cover over the bat-

tery's negative terminal or unscrew the

cover from the battery.

5. Disconnect the negative battery lead.

6. Detach the lower console holding the bat-

tery.

7. Undo the positive cable, and if there is a

plastic cover, after turning the plastic cover

aside.

8. Undo the evacuation hose.

9. Remove the battery.

Fitting the battery 1. Fit the battery into position.

2. Position the lower console and screw it in

place.

3. Connect the positive cable, press in, and if

there is a plastic cover, turn it down.

4. Connect the negative cable, and if there is

a plastic cover, turn it down.

5. Fit the plastic cover or the cover over the

battery.

6. Make sure the evacuation hose is correctly

connected to both the battery and the out-

let in the bodywork.

7. Fit the lock brace over the battery and

tighten the screws.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 195

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs09

196

General

All bulb specifications are given on page 270.

The following list contains bulbs and point-

source lamps that are specialised or unsuitable

for changing except at a workshop:

Active Bi-Xenon and Bi-Xenon lamp

General interior lighting in the roof.

Reading lamps

Glovebox lighting

Direction indicators in the door mirrors.

Approach lighting in the door mirrors.

High-level brake light.

LED lights in rear lamp cluster.

WARNING

On cars with Bi-Xenon and Active Bi- Xenon headlamps, Xenon lamp replace- ment must be carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. The headlamps must be handled with extreme care due to the Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit.

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oil from your fin- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

Changing front bulbs

G 02

72 78

All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are

changed by first removing the lamp housing

from the engine compartment.

NOTE

If you experience difficulty when replacing a bulb then we recommend that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Location of the bulbs in the headlamp

G 02

84 33

Side marker lamp

Direction indicator

Dipped beam lamp, position lamp (halogen

and Bi-Xenon )

Main beam bulb, position lamp (active Bi-

Xenon )

On certain variants, a white plastic sleeve may

impede bulb replacement. This can be broken

off and discarded.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 196

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

197

Dipped beam, halogen

G 02

84 35

To remove the bulb 1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key

to position 0.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Unplug the connector.

4. Disconnect the spring clamp. First push to

the right so that the spring clamp discon-

nects, then out and down.

5. Pull out and remove the bulb.

G 02

84 36

To fit 1. Fit the new bulb. In can only be positioned

one way.

2. Press the clamp spring upwards and a little

to the left so that it secures in its catch.

3. Plug in the connector.

4. Refit the cover.

Main beam

G 02

84 37

To remove the bulb 1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key

to position 0.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and pull it out.

4. Undo the connector by pressing the catch

out and then pulling.

To fit 1. Plug the connector into the bulb, a click is

heard.

2. Refit the bulb, turn it in position.

3. Refit the cover.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 197

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs09

198

Position/parking lamps

G 02

27 33

Halogen and Bi-Xenon headlamps.

To remove the bulb 1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key

to position 0.

2. Remove the cover (same cover as for

dipped beam).

3. Pull out the lamp.

4. Unplug the connector.

To fit 1. Fit the new bulb.

2. Plug in the connector.

3. Refit the cover. G

02 71

71

Active Bi-Xenon headlamps.

To remove the bulb 1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key

to position 0.

2. Remove the cover where the main beam is

also located.

3. Pull out the lamp.

4. Unplug the connector.

To fit 1. Fit the new bulb.

2. Plug in the connector.

3. Refit the cover.

Direction indicator, left-hand side

G 02

84 38

To remove the bulb 1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key

to position 0.

2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and

remove it.

3. Press the bulb inwards, turn it anticlock-

wise and remove it from the bulb holder.

To fit 1. Fit the new bulb by pressing it in and turn-

ing it clockwise.

2. Refit the bulb holder in the lamp housing

and turn it clockwise.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 198

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

199

Direction indicator, right-hand side

G 02

72 83

1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key

to position 0.

2. Remove the radiator hose (1) from the radi-

ator.

3. Remove the screw (2) to the filler pipe.

4. Pull the pipe (3) straight up.

5. Remove the ventilation hose (4) from the

pipe.

6. Replace the bulb.

7. Check that the washer fluid reservoir gas-

ket between the filler pipe and the holder is

properly secured.

8. Put the filler pipe (3) back into place.

9. Refit the ventilation hose onto the filler pipe

(4).

10. Screw in the screw (2) to the filler pipe and

refit the radiator hose to the radiator (1).

Side marker lamps

G 02

84 39

1. Turn the bulb holder clockwise and pull it

out.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Refit the bulb holder by turning it anticlock-

wise.

Front fog lamps

To remove the bulb

G 02

72 27

1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key

to position 0.

2. Turn the bulb holder slightly anticlockwise.

3. Pull out and remove the bulb.

To fit 1. Fit the new bulb. In can only be positioned

one way.

2. Refit the bulb holder, turn it clockwise

slightly. The "TOP" mark must be upward.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 199

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs09

200

Cargo area

G 02

84 41

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that

the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Remove the bulb.

3. Fit a new bulb.

4. Refit the lamp housing.

Number plate lighting

G 02

84 42

1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key

to position 0.

2. Remove the screw with a screwdriver.

3. Loosen the whole lamp housing carefully

and pull it out. Turn the contact anticlock-

wise and pull out the bulb.

4. Fit the new bulb.

5. Plug in the connector and turn it clockwise

in the lamp housing.

6. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it

into place.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 200

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

201

Rear light cluster

3501204m

G 02

72 77

Location of bulbs Brake light

Position/parking lamps

Rear fog lamp (one side)

Side marker lamps

Direction indicators

Reversing lamp

Removing All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster can be

replaced from inside the cargo area.

Bulb specifications can be found on page

270.

1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key

to position 0.

2. Unlock and fold down the side panel to

access the bulbs.

The bulbs are located in two separate bulb

holders, an upper and a lower. Each bulb

holder has a locking pin.

To replace the bulb 1. Detach the connector from the bulb holder.

2. Press the catches together and pull out the

holder.

3. Remove the bulb

4. Fit the new bulb in the holder.

5. Plug in the connector.

6. Close and secure the side panel.

NOTE

If the message BULB FAILURE/CHECK STOP LAMP remains after a faulty bulb has been replaced then an authorised Volvo workshop must be consulted.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 201

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs09

202

Courtesy lighting

G 02

72 87

There is courtesy lighting under the instrument

panel on the driver and passenger sides.

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that

the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Remove the bulb.

3. Fit a new bulb.

4. Refit the lamp housing.

Vanity mirror lighting

G 02

84 43

Vanity mirror*, different versions.

1. Insert a screwdriver and turn so that the

lamp lens releases.

2. Remove the bulb.

3. Fit a new bulb.

4. First press the bottom of the lamp glass

back into place above the four hooks. Then

press the top in place.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 202

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

203

General

G 02

71 79

Cable routing may vary slightly due to engine variant. However, the components listed are in the same positions.

All electrical functions and components are

fused to protect your car's electrical system

from damage by short circuiting and overload-

ing.

Fuses are housed in four different locations in

the car:

Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment.

Fuse box in the passenger compartment

within the sound barrier on the driver's

side.

Fuse box in the passenger compartment at

dashboard end on driver's side.

Fuse box in cargo area.

Changing If an electrical component or function does not

work, this may be because the component's

fuse was temporarily overloaded and blew.

1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side

to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse

of the same colour and amperage.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

There are a number of spare fuses in the cover

on the end face of the dashboard. There are

also pliers which facilitate the removal and fit-

ting of fuses. If the same fuse blows repeatedly,

there is a fault in the component, and you

should contact an authorised Volvo workshop

to have it checked.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 203

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses09

204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment

G 02

69 72

Press in the plastic catches on the short sides of the box and pull the cover upward.

1. ABS 30 A

2. ABS 30 A

3. High-pressure washer,

headlamps 35 A

4. Parking heater* 25 A

5. Auxiliary lamps* 20 A

6. Starter motor relay 35 A

7. Windscreen wipers 25 A

8. Fuel pump 15 A

9. Transmission control

module (TCM), diesel 15 A

10. Ignition coils (petrol),

engine control module

(ECM), injection valves

(diesel) 20 A

11. Accelerator pedal sensor

(APM), AC compressor,

fan electronics box 10 A

12. Engine control module

(ECM) (petrol), injection

valves (petrol), mass air

flow sensor (petrol) 15 A

mass air flow sensor (die-

sel) 5 A

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 204

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

205

13. Electronic throttle mod-

ule (ETM), (petrol) 10 A

Electronic throttle mod-

ule (ETM), air mixing

valve, fuel pressure reg-

ulator, solenoid valve,

(diesel) 15 A

14. Lambda-sond (petrol) 20 A

Lambda-sond (diesel) 10 A

15. Crankcase ventilation

heater, solenoid valves

(petrol) 10 A

solenoid valves, glow

plugs (diesel) 15 A

16. Dipped beam, left 20 A

17. Dipped beam, right 20 A

18. - -

19. Engine control module

(ECM) supply, engine

relay 5 A

20. Position lamps 15 A

21. Vacuum pump 20 A

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 205

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses09

206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses in the passenger compartment at instrument panel end face on driver's side

22

24

23

21

29

27

28

26

25

9

8

7

19

18

17

16

4

5

6

3

2

13

14

15

12

11

38

36

37

33

34

35

31

32

201 10 30

G 03

23 40

A decal which specifies the positions and amperages of the fuses is located in the end box cover.

1. Power driver's seat* 25 A

2. Power passenger seat* 25 A

3. Climate control system

fan 30 A

4. Control module, right

front door 25 A

5. Control module, left front

door 25 A

6. General lighting, ceiling

(RCM) Upper electronic

module (UEM) 10 A

7. Sunroof* 15 A

8. Ignition switch, SRS sys-

tem, engine control mod-

ule (ECM), deactivating

SRS passenger side,

(PACOS), electronic

immobiliser (IMMO),

transmission control

module (TCM), diesel, 7.5 A

9. OBDII, light switch (LSM),

Steering Angle Sensor

(SAS), Steering Wheel

Module (SWM) 5 A

10. Audio 20 A

11. Amplifier* 30 A

12. RTI display* 10 A

13. Phone* 5 A

14. - 38 -

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 206

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207

Fuses in the passenger compartment within the sound barrier on the driver's side

G 02

84 12

1. Seat heating, right side 15 A

2. Seat heating, left side 15 A

3. Horn 15 A

4. - -

5. - -

6. Reserve -

7. Reserve -

8. Siren* 5 A

9. Brake lamp switch feed 5 A

10. Combined instrument

panel (DIM), climate con-

trol (CCM), parking

heater, power driver's

seat 10 A

11. Front and rear seat socket 15 A

12. - -

13. Reserve -

14. - -

15. ABS, STC/DSTC 5 A

16. Electronic power steering

(ECPS), Active Bi-

Xenon (HCM), headlamp

levelling 10 A

17. Fog lamp, front left 7.5 A

18. Fog lamp, front right 7.5 A

19. Reserve -

20. Reserve -

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 207

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses09

208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

21. Transmission Control

Module (TCM), reverse

gear inhibitor (M66) 10 A

22. Main beam, left 10 A

23. Main beam, right 10 A

24. - -

25. - -

26. Reserve -

27. Reserve -

28. Power passenger seat*,

audio 5 A

29. Fuel pump 7.5 A

30. BLIS* 5 A

31. Reserve -

32. Reserve -

33. Vacuum pump 20 A

34. - -

35. - -

36. - -

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 208

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209

Fuses in the cargo area

G 02

69 68

1. Reversing lamp 10 A

2. Position lamps, fog lamps,

cargo area lighting, num-

ber plate lighting, lamps in

brake lighting 20 A

3. Accessories (AEM)* 15 A

4. Reserve -

5. REM electronics 10 A

6. CD changer, TV, RTI* 7.5 A

7. Towing bracket wiring*

(30-feed) 15 A

8. Cargo area socket 15 A

9. Rear right door: Power

window, power window

lock 20 A

10. Rear left door: Power win-

dow, power window lock 20 A

11. Reserve -

12. Reserve -

13. Diesel filter heater 15 A

14. - -

15. Reserve -

16. Reserve -

17. Audio accessories* 5 A

18. Reserve -

19. Foldable head restraint* 15 A

20. Towing bracket wiring*

(15-feed) 20 A

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 209

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses09

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

21. Reserve -

22. - -

23. AWD 7.5 A

24. Four-C SUM* 15 A

25. - -

26. Park Assist* 5 A

27. Main fuse: Towing bracket

wiring, Four-C, Parking

assistance, AWD 30 A

28. Central locking system

(PCL) 15 A

29. Trailer lighting, left: Posi-

tion lamps, direction indi-

cator* 25 A

30. Trailer lighting, right: Brake

lamp, rear fog lamp, direc-

tion indicator* 25 A

31. Main fuse: Fuse 37, 38 40 A

32. - -

33. - -

34. - -

35. - -

36. - -

37. Heated rear window 20 A

38. Heated rear window 20 A

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 210

evastarck

09 Maintenance and service

09

211

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 211

evastarck

G 02

09 24

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Overview HU-450.................................................................................. 214

Overview HU-650.................................................................................. 215

Overview HU-850.................................................................................. 216

Audio functions HU-450/650/850......................................................... 217

Audio functions HU-450........................................................................ 219

Audio functions HU-650/850................................................................ 220

Radio functions HU-450/650/850......................................................... 222

Radio functions HU-450....................................................................... 224

Radio functions HU-650/850................................................................ 225

Radio functions HU-450/650/850......................................................... 226

Cassette player HU-450........................................................................ 231

CD player HU-650................................................................................. 233

Internal CD changer HU-850................................................................. 234

External CD changer HU-450/650/850*................................................ 235

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850.................................................... 236

Technical data....................................................................................... 238

Phone functions*................................................................................... 239

Call options........................................................................................... 242

Memory functions................................................................................. 245

Menu functions..................................................................................... 247

Miscellaneous information.................................................................... 252

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 212

evastarck

10 INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 213

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Overview HU-450

10

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

HU-450

21 3 76 84 5

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 G

02 55

97

TAPE Shortcuts

FM Shortcut between FM1, FM2, FM3

AM Shortcut between AM1, AM2

AUTO Automatic station preset

Display

SCAN Automatic station search

Navigation buttons CD/radio seek/

change station or track, cassette/CD Fast

forward/rewind/select next/previous track

EXIT Scroll back in the menu

BASS Press out and turn TREBLE

Press out, pull and turn

POWER (On/Off) Press VOLUME Turn

REV - Cassette - Tape direction selector -

CD changer* - Random

Cassette opening

PRESET/CD PUSH MENU Stored radio

stations CD changer*

Cassette eject

SOURCE PUSH MENU Opens main

menu Press Turn to select: Radio (FM/

AM), Cassette, CD changer*

FADER Press out and turn BAL Press

out, pull and turn

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 214

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Overview HU-650

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215

HU-650

COMPACT

DIGITAL AUDIO

1

7

8

9

10

11

12

2 653 4

16 17 1813 14 15 G

02 55

98

RND CD random

AM Shortcut between AM1, AM2

CD slot

Display

SCAN Automatic station search

CD eject

FM Shortcut between FM1, FM2, FM3

CD Shortcuts

AUTO Automatic station preset

Navigation buttons seek/change station

or track

EXIT Scroll back in the menu

1-6 Station setting buttons/selecting CD

changer position

POWER (On/Off) Press VOLUME Turn

BASS Press out and turn

TREBLE Press out and turn

BALANCE Press out and turn

FADER Press out and turn

SOURCE PUSH MENU Opens the main

menu: Press and turn to select: Radio FM

or AM, CD or CD changer*

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 215

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Overview HU-850

10

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

HU-850

COMPACT

DIGITAL AUDIO

9

10

11

12

13

14

87

16 17 1815 20 2119

1 2 653 4

G 02

55 99

RND CD random

AM Shortcut between AM1, AM2

CD slot

Display

3-CH 3-channel stereo

OFF 2-channel stereo

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II

CD eject

FM Shortcut between FM1, FM2, FM3

CD - CD player

AUTO Automatic station preset

Navigation buttons seek/change station

or track

EXIT Scroll back in the menu

SCAN Automatic station search

POWER (On/Off) Press VOLUME Turn

1-6 Station setting buttons/selecting CD

changer position

BASS Press out and turn

TREBLE Press out and turn

BALANCE Press out and turn

FADER Press out and turn

SOURCE PUSH MENU Opens the main

menu: Press and turn to select: Radio FM

or AM, CD or CD changer*

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 216

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions HU-450/650/850

10

217

On/Off switch

Press the knob to turn on or

switch off the radio.

Volume control

Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume.

The volume control is electronic and has no

end position. If you have a steering wheel key-

pad, increase or decrease volume with (+) or

() buttons.

Low battery voltage

If battery voltage is low, a text appears in the

combined instrument unit display. The energy

economy function of the car may switch off the

radio. Charge the battery by starting the

engine.

Volume control TP/PTY/NEWS

If a cassette or CD is playing when the radio

receives a traffic bulletin, news or selected pro-

gramme type, the function is interrupted and

the bulletin or message is broadcast with the

volume selected for traffic information, news or

programme type.

When the bulletin or message is finished, the

unit immediately returns to the previously set

volume and resumes playing the cassette or

CD.

The audio system can be equipped with differ-

ent options and different versions. There are

three audio system versions:

Performance

High Performance

Premium Sound.

FM and AM radio with RDS and CD player is

however included in each version.

AUX

G 02

66 78

Input for external audio source (AUX) 3.5 mm

The AUX input can be used for connecting an

MP3 player for example.

Sometimes the AUX external audio source can

be heard at a different volume to the internal

audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio

volume of the external audio source is too high

then the sound quality can be impaired. Pre-

vent this by adjusting the input volume of the

AUX input.

Volume control AUX 1. Press SOURCE, turn to ADVANCED

MENU and select by pressing SOURCE.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 217

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions HU-450/650/850

10

218

2. Press SOURCE, turn to AUDIO

SETTINGS and select by pressing

SOURCE.

3. Press SOURCE, turn to AUX INPUT

LEVEL and select by pressing SOURCE.

In this mode the volume can be adjusted by

turning SOURCE.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 218

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions HU-450

10

219

Optimum sound reproduction

The audio system is calibrated for optimum

sound reproduction by means of digital signal

processing.

This calibration takes into account loudspeak-

ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment

acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-

bination of car model and audio system.

There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes

into account the level set for the volume con-

trol, radio reception and vehicle speed.

The controls that are explained in these oper-

ating instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and Equal-

izer, are only intended for the user to be able to

adapt the sound reproduction according to

personal taste.

Bass

Adjust the bass by pressing

out the knob and turning it to

the left or right.

The bass is "normalised" in

the centre position. Press the

knob back into its original

position after adjustment.

Treble

Adjust the treble by pressing

the knob, pulling it out farther

and turning it to the left or

right. The treble is "normal-

ised" in the centre position.

Press the knob back into its

original position after adjust-

ment.

Fader Balance front/rear

Set a suitable balance

between the front and rear

speakers by pressing the

knob and turning it right (more

sound from front pair) or left

(more sound from rear pair).

The balance is "normalised"

in the centre position. Press the knob back into

its original position after adjustment.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 219

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions HU-650/850

10

220 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Balance right/left

Adjust the balance by press-

ing, pulling out the knob and

turning it to the left or right.

The balance is "normalised"

in the centre position. Press

the knob back into its original

position after adjustment.

Selecting the audio source

There are two ways to select

audio source:

Either with the shortcut keys

AM, FM, TAPE or with the

SOURCE knob. Turn the

SOURCE knob to select

between radio settings (FM1, FM2, FM3 and

AM1, AM2). If a cassette player or CD

changer* is connected, it can also be selected

with the knob.

Press the AM and FM button

repeatedly to toggle between

FM1, FM2, FM3 and AM1, AM2.

The selected audio source is

shown in the display.

Bass

G 02

71 91

Adjust the bass by pressing out the knob and

turning it to the left or right.

The bass is "normalised" in the centre position.

Press the knob back into its original position

after adjustment.

Treble

Adjust the treble by pressing out the knob and

turning it to the left or right. The treble is "nor-

malised" in the centre position. Press the knob

back into its original position after adjustment.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 220

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions HU-650/850

10

221

Balance right/left

Adjust balance by pressing the knob and turn-

ing it left or right. The balance is "normalised"

in the centre position. Press the knob back into

its original position after adjustment.

Fader Balance front/rear

Set a suitable balance between the front and

rear speakers by pressing the knob and turning

it right (more sound from front pair) or left (more

sound from rear pair). The balance is "normal-

ised" in the centre position. Press the knob

back into its original position after adjustment.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 221

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions HU-450/650/850

10

222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Selecting the audio source

There are two ways to select

audio source:

Either with the shortcut keys

AM, FM, TAPE or with the

SOURCE knob.

Turn the SOURCE knob to select between

radio settings (FM1, FM2, FM3 and AM1, AM2).

If a cassette player 1 or CD changer* is con-

nected, it can also be selected with the knob.

Press the AM - and FM button

repeatedly to toggle between

FM1, FM2, FM3 and AM1, AM2.

The selected audio source is

shown in the display.

Scanning

Press the SCAN button to start

the search. When the radio

finds a station, it stops there for

about 10 seconds and then

continues its search. To listen

to the station, press the SCAN

or EXIT button.

Tuning

Press or to seek lower or

higher frequencies. The radio searches for the

next audible station and then stops. Press the

button again to continue the search.

Manual tuning

Press and hold or . MAN is

shown in the display. The radio slowly scrolls

in the desired direction, increasing its tempo

after a few seconds. Release the button when

the desired frequency shows in the display.

The frequency can then be adjusted by briefly

pressing one of the arrow keys or

. Manual adjustment mode stays in

effect five seconds after the last press.

Steering wheel keypad

If you have a keypad in the steering wheel,

press the right or left arrow to select preset

stations.

G 02

70 04

NOTE

If the car is equipped with an integrated phone, the steering wheel keypad cannot be used for radio functions while the phone is in active mode. Phone information is shown continuously in the display when the phone is activated.

1 HU-450

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 222

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions HU-450/650/850

10

223

Switch off the phone by pressing . If

there is no SIM card in the phone, switch it off,

see page 241.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 223

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions HU-450

10

224

Programming stations

1. Set the desired frequency.

2. Briefly press the PRESET/CD knob.

3. Select a number by turning forward or

back.

Press again to store the desired frequency and

station.

Preset To select a preset radio pro-

gramme, turn the PRESET/CD

knob to the stored number. The

preset programme is shown in

the display.

Autostoring stations This function automatically

seeks and stores up to 10

strong AM or FM stations in a

separate memory. The function

is especially useful in areas in

which you are unfamiliar with

the radio stations or their frequencies.

1. Select radio mode using the FM or AM

button.

2. Start the search by pressing and holding

AUTO (more than 2 seconds).

3. AUTO is shown in the display and a num-

ber of strong stations (max. 10) from the set

frequency band are saved in the autostore

memory. If there are no stations with suffi-

cient signal strength, NO STATION is dis-

played.

4. Briefly press the AUTO button or one of the

arrows of the steering wheel keypad to

scroll to another of the automatically preset

stations.

AUTO is shown in the display when the radio

is in Autostore mode. The text disappears

when you return to normal Radio mode.

Returning to normal Radio mode Press FM, AM or EXIT or turn the

PRESET/CD knob.

Returning to Autostore mode Briefly press AUTO.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 224

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions HU-650/850

10

225

Storing stations

G 02

71 89

To store stations on the preset buttons 1 - 6:

1. Set the desired station.

2. Press and hold the required station storage

button. The sound mutes a few seconds.

Station STORED is shown in the display.

Up to 6 stations each can be stored under

AM1, AM2, FM1, FM2 and FM3, a total of

30 stations.

Autostoring stations

AUTO automatically seeks and

stores up to 10 strong AM or

FM stations in a separate mem-

ory. If more than ten stations

are found, the ten strongest are

selected. The function is espe-

cially useful in areas where the radio stations

and their frequencies are unfamiliar.

Select radio mode using the AM or FM

button.

Start the search by pressing and holding

AUTO (more than 2 seconds).

AUTO is shown in the display and a number of

strong stations (max. 10) from the set fre-

quency band are saved in the autostore mem-

ory. If there are no stations with sufficient signal

strength, NO STATION is displayed.

Briefly press the AUTO button or one of the

arrows of the steering wheel keypad to

scroll to another of the automatically preset

stations.

AUTO is shown in the display when the radio

is in Autostore mode. The text disappears

when you return to normal Radio mode.

Returning to normal Radio mode Press the FM, AM or EXIT button.

Returning to Autostore mode Briefly press AUTO.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 225

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions HU-450/650/850

10

226

Radio Data System RDS

RDS is a system that links together specific

network transmitters. It is used, for example, to

tune the correct frequency of a station irre-

spective of the transmitter or the active audio

source (e.g. CD). The system can also be used

for receiving traffic information and for finding

broadcasts of a specific type. Radio text is also

a component of RDS. A radio station can, for

example, transmit information about the radio

programme currently being broadcast.

Some radio stations do not use RDS or only

use a limited range of its features.

PI seek (automatic search for stations)

When listening to an RDS transmitter, various

information, such as traffic information, is

stored in the radio.

When a preset RDS transmitter is later

selected, the radio updates the transmitter's

RDS information. If the radio is at the boundary

or just outside of the transmitter's range, the

radio automatically seeks the strongest possi-

ble transmitter of that channel.

If there is no audible transmitter, the radio qui-

ets and the PI SEEK appears in the display

until the station is found.

Traffic information TP Station

Traffic information from RDS stations inter-

rupts other audio sources. The message is

heard at the volume set for this specific feature.

As soon as the message ends, the radio returns

to the previous audio source and volume set-

ting.

Activating traffic information 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Select TP and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select TP ON (flashing

text) and press SOURCE.

4. Press EXIT.

Deactivate TP 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Select TP and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select TP OFF (flashing

text) and press SOURCE.

4. Press EXIT.

TP is shown in the display when this function

is active.

Press EXIT if you do not wish to listen to a traf-

fic bulletin. However, the TP function remains

active and the radio waits for the next traffic

bulletin.

Activate traffic information from a

special channel 1. Select radio mode using the FM button.

2. Activate the station from which traffic infor-

mation is to be received.

3. Press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

5. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.

6. Turn SOURCE, select TP STATION and

press SOURCE.

7. Turn SOURCE, select SET CURRENT and press SOURCE.

8. Press EXIT.

Deactivating TP Station 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 226

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions HU-450/650/850

10

227

4. Turn SOURCE, select TP STATION and

press SOURCE.

5. Turn SOURCE, select TP STATION OFF and press SOURCE.

6. Press EXIT.

Alarm Alarm! is shown in the radio display when an

alarm message is broadcast. This function is

used to warn motorists of major accidents and

catastrophes, such as a bridge collapse or an

accident at a nuclear plant.

TP search This function allows you to listen to traffic infor-

mation when travelling between different areas

and countries without selecting a station.

1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select TP SEARCH and

press SOURCE.

5. Turn SOURCE, select TP SEARCH ON or

TP SEARCH OFF (flashing text) and press

SOURCE.

6. Press EXIT.

News

Messages with a programme code (such as

news from RDS stations) will interrupt other

audio sources at the volume set for this specific

feature. As soon as the news broadcast is fin-

ished, the audio system returns to the previous

audio source and volume setting. As soon as

the news broadcast is finished, the audio sys-

tem returns to the previous audio source and

resumes the previous volume setting.

Activating News 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS and press

SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS ON (flashing

text) and press SOURCE.

4. Press EXIT.

NEWS appears on the display.

Deactivating News 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS and press

SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS OFF (flash-

ing text) and press SOURCE.

4. Press EXIT.

NEWS disappears from the display.

Press EXIT if you do not wish to listen to a news

broadcast. However, the News function

remains active and the radio waits for the next

news programme.

Interruptions for news from the current

station 1. Select radio mode using the FM button.

2. Activate the station from which traffic infor-

mation is to be received.

3. Press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

5. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.

6. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS STATION and press SOURCE.

7. Turn SOURCE, select SET CURRENT and press SOURCE.

8. Press EXIT.

Deactivating News Station 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 227

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions HU-450/650/850

10

228

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS STATION and press SOURCE.

5. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS STN OFF and press SOURCE.

6. Press EXIT.

Programme type PTY

Use the PTY function to select between the

various programme types.

1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select PTY and press

SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select PTY in the menu

and press SOURCE.

The radio begins seeking the selected pro-

gramme type.

If you do not wish to listen to the station found

by the radio, continue the search using the left

or right arrow key.

If the radio does not find a station with the

selected programme type, it returns to the pre-

vious frequency.

Not all radio stations have a PTY designation.

Programme type Display shows

OFF PTY OFF

Current affairs Current

Religion Spiritual

Country music Country

Documentary Document

Finance Finance

Folk music Folk music

Leisure and hobby Leisure

Children's progs Children's progs

Oldies music "Oldies"

Information Info

Jazz music Jazz

Serious classic Classical

Culture and Art Culture

Programme type Display shows

Light classic L Class

Easy listening Easy listening

National music Nation M

News News

Pop music Pop

Travel and holiday Travel

Rock music Rock

Social affairs Social

Sport Sport

Drama Drama

Phone In Phone

Entertainment Enterta

Education Educ

Science Science

Weather & Metro Weather & Metro

Other music Other M

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 228

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions HU-450/650/850

10

229

PTY standby PTY mode is then in standby until the selected

programme type is broadcast. At which time

the radio automatically switches to the station

sending the selected programme type.

Deactivating 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select PTY press

SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select PTY OFF press

SOURCE.

4. Press EXIT. The symbol PTY goes out and

the radio returns to normal mode.

PTY language Select the language for the radio display (Eng-

lish, German, French or Swedish).

1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select PTY LANGUAGE and press SOURCE.

5. Turn SOURCE, select language and press

SOURCE.

6. Press EXIT.

Automatic frequency updating

The AF function is normally activate and

ensures that the radio tunes to the strongest

available transmitter for a radio station.

Activating AF 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS

MENU and press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select AF ON (flashing

text) and press SOURCE.

5. Press EXIT.

Deactivating AF 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS

MENU and press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select AF OFF (flashing

text) and press SOURCE.

5. Press EXIT.

Regional radio programmes

The regional function is normally deactivated.

When the function is activated you can con-

tinue to listen to a regional broadcasts even if

the signal is weak.

Activating REG 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS

MENU and press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select REG ON (flashing

text) and press SOURCE.

5. Press EXIT.

Deactivating REG

Select radio mode using the FM button and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS MENU and press SOURCE.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 229

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions HU-450/650/850

10

230

Turn SOURCE, select REG OFF (flashing text) and press SOURCE.

Press EXIT.

EON Local/Distant (Enhanced Other Networks)

When EON is activated, the radio programme

is interrupted for traffic bulletins, news broad-

casts or the like from other channels.

The function has two levels Local only interrupts if the signal is strong.

Distant also interrupts with weaker signals.

1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS

MENU and press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select EON (flashing text)

and press SOURCE.

5. Turn SOURCE, select Local or Distant and press SOURCE.

6. Press EXIT.

Resetting RDS functions Resets all radio settings to the original factory

settings.

1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select RESET TO

DEFAULT and press SOURCE.

4. Press EXIT.

ASC (Active Sound Control)

The ASC function automatically adapts the

volume of the radio to vehicle speed.

Activating ASC: 1. Select radio mode using the FM button and

press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS

MENU and press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select ASC LEVEL and

press SOURCE.

5. Turn SOURCE, select LOW, MEDIUM,

HIGH or Off and press SOURCE.

Radio text

Some RDS stations transmit information on

programme content, artists, etc.

Hold the FM button depressed a few seconds

to access any transmitted radio text, which

then appears in the display.

After the text is shown twice, the radio once

again displays the station/frequency.

A brief press on EXIT ends the radio text dis-

play.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 230

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Cassette player HU-450

10

231

Cassette opening

DOLBY B NR

G 02

72 46

Insert the cassette in the slot with the wider

part to the right. TAPE Side A appears in the

display.

When one side is finished, the cassette player

automatically plays back the other side (auto

reverse).

To play a cassette that is already in the cas-

sette player, turn the SOURCE knob or press

the TAPE shortcut key.

Changing tape direction

Press the REV button in order to play the other

side of the cassette; the side being played will

be shown in the display.

Cassette eject

If you press the button, the tape

stops and the cassette is ejec-

ted. Turn the SOURCE knob to

select a new programme

source. The cassette can be

inserted or ejected even if the

system is switched off.

Dolby B Noise Reduction

This is a preset function which can be switched

off as follows: press and hold the REV button

until the Dolby symbol disappears from the

display. Press the same button again in order

to reactivate the Dolby function.

Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under

license of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor-

poration. Dolby and the double D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licens-

ing Corporation.

Scanning

Scan (SCAN) plays the first

ten seconds of each track.

Press the SCAN or EXIT button

when you find a track you wish

to listen to.

Fast forward/reverse

The tape is fast forwarded by pressing and

holding and is rewound with .

" FF" (fast forward) or " REW" (rewind) is

shown in the display during this time. Press the

button again to stop fast forwarding/rewinding.

G 02

70 04

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 231

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Cassette player HU-450

10

232

Next track Previous track

Pressing automatically fast forwards

the tape to the next track.

Pressing automatically rewinds the

tape to the previous track. For this function to

be operational, there must be a five second

pause between tracks.

If the car is equipped with a steering wheel

keypad, the arrows can also be used.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 232

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

CD player HU-650

10

233

CD player

Insert a CD. If there is already a CD in the

player, activate it by turning the SOURCE knob

or pressing the CD shortcut key.

CD eject

If you press the button shown in

the illustration, the CD player

stops playing and the disc is

ejected.

NOTE

For reasons of traffic safety, you have twelve seconds to handle the ejected disc. Otherwise, the CD is drawn back into the player and resumes with the most recently played track.

Fast forward/reverse and change track

Press and hold down the right

or left-hand arrow key to fast

forward/reverse a track or the

whole disc. Fast forward/

reversing cannot be done using

the steering wheel keypad.

Briefly press the left or right-hand arrow key to

go to the previous or next track. The steering

wheel keypad can also be used for this. Track

numbers are shown in the display.

Scanning

Scan plays the first 10 seconds of each track.

Press the SCAN or EXIT button when you find

a track you wish to listen to.

Random

Press RND (random) to activate

the random function. The CD

player plays tracks from the

disc in random order. RND is

displayed as long as this func-

tion is activated.

CDs

Using CD discs burned at home could result in

poor or non-existent sound. Music CD discs

complying with the ISO 60908 standard pro-

vide the best sound quality.

IMPORTANT

Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CDs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 233

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Internal CD changer HU-850

10

234

Internal CD changer

HU-850 contains an internal 6-disc CD

changer. Press the CD shortcut key or turn the

SOURCE knob to activate the CD player. The

CD player resumes with the most recently

played CD.

Up to 6 discs can be inserted in the CD player.

An empty slot in the player must be selected

when inserting a disc. This is done by selecting

from buttons 1 - 6. An available position is

shown in the display. Make sure " LOAD

DISC" is shown before inserting a new disc.

CD eject

If you press the button shown in

the illustration, the CD player

stops playing and the disc is

ejected.

NOTE

For reasons of traffic safety, you have twelve seconds to handle the ejected disc. Otherwise, the CD is drawn back into the player and resumes with the most recently played track.

Selecting disc number

Use buttons 1-6 to select which disc is to be

played. The disc and track numbers are shown

in the display.

Fast forward/reverse and change track

Press and hold down the right

or left-hand arrow key to fast

forward/reverse a track or the

whole disc. Fast forward/

reversing cannot be done using

the steering wheel keypad.

Briefly press the left or right-hand arrow key to

go to the previous or next track. The steering

wheel keypad can also be used for this. Track

numbers are shown in the display.

Scanning

Scan plays the first ten seconds of each track.

Press the SCAN or EXIT button when you find

a track you wish to listen to.

Random

Press RND (random) to activate

the random function. A ran-

domly selected track is played

from a randomly selected disc.

A new track or disc is then

selected the same way. RND is

displayed while this function is active.

CD discs

Using CD discs burned at home could result in

poor or non-existent sound. Music CD discs

complying with the ISO 60908 standard pro-

vide the best sound quality.

IMPORTANT

Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CDs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 234

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

External CD changer HU-450/650/850*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235

CD changer

G 02

71 81

The external CD changer is mounted behind

the panel on the rear left-hand side of the cargo

area.

Activate the CD changer mode by turning the

SOURCE knob; the CD changer resumes play-

ing the most recently played disc and track. If

the CD player cartridge is empty, LOAD

CARTRIDGE will be shown in the display.

Loading discs in the CD changer 1. Slide open the CD changer cover

2. Press the cartridge eject button on the

changer.

3. Pull out the CD cartridge and insert the

discs.

4. Reinsert the cartridge in the CD changer.

Selecting discs

Select which disc is to be played by turning the

PRESET/CD knob (HU-450) or using buttons

1 - 6 (HU-650/850). The disc and track num-

bers are shown in the display.

Some CD changers take 10 discs. Press and

hold button 6 for a couple of seconds to select

discs 7 - 10.

Fast forward/reverse and change track

Press and hold down the right

or left-hand arrow key to fast

forward/reverse a track or the

whole disc. Fast forward/

reversing cannot be done using

the steering wheel keypad.

Briefly press the left or right-hand arrow key to

go to the previous or next track. The steering

wheel keypad can also be used for this. Track

numbers are shown in the display.

Scanning

Scan plays the first 10 seconds of each track.

Press the SCAN or EXIT button when you find

a track you wish to listen to.

Random

Press RND (HU-650 and 850)

to activate the Random func-

tion. For radio HU-450, it is acti-

vated with the REV button.

A randomly selected track is

played from a randomly

selected disc. A new track or disc is then

selected the same way. RND is displayed as

long as this function is activated.

CDs

Using CD discs burned at home could result in

poor or non-existent sound. Music CD discs

complying with the ISO 60908 standard pro-

vide the best sound quality.

IMPORTANT

Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CDs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 235

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850

10

236

General

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is a further refine-

ment of the previous system and provides a

significantly improved sound experience. This

improvement is especially noticeable to rear

seat passengers.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II together with a

centre speaker in the instrument panel offers a

sound experience very close to being there.

The normal left-right stereo channels are divi-

ded into left-centre-right. In addition, surround

sound is produced by the rear speakers. Dolby

Surround Pro Logic II works in CD mode.

3-channel stereo ( 3-CH) is recommended for

AM and FM radio transmissions.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is a trademark of

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Dolby Pro Logic II Surround System is manu-

factured under license from Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II Mode

To select Dolby Surround Pro

Logic II Mode press PL II.

PL II is shown in the dis-

play Press OFF to return to 2-

channel stereo.

3-channel stereo

Select 3-channel stereo by

pressing 3-CH. " 3 ch" will be

shown in the display. Resume

2-channel stereo function by

pressing OFF.

Centre Level

This function is used to set the level of the cen-

tre channel.

1. Press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select CENTRE LEVEL and press SOURCE.

5. Turn SOURCE, select level and press

SOURCE.

6. Press EXIT.

Surround Level

This function is used to set the output level of

the rear channels.

1. Press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select SURROUND

LEVEL and press SOURCE.

5. Turn SOURCE, select level and press

SOURCE.

6. Press EXIT.

Mid EQ Level

This function is used to fine-tune the sound

from the speakers.

1. Press SOURCE.

2. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED

MENU and press SOURCE.

3. Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.

4. Turn SOURCE, select MID EQ LEVEL and

press SOURCE.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 236

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850

10

237

5. Turn SOURCE, select level and press

SOURCE.

6. Press EXIT.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 237

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Technical data

10

238

HU-450 HU-650 HU-850

Output 4 25 W 4 25 W 1 25 W (centre loudspeaker)

Impedance 4 Ohm

Operating voltage 12 V, negative ground

External amplifier 4 50 W or 4 75 W A 4 50 W or 4 75 W B

Radio

Frequency

U (FM) 87.5 108 MHz

M (AM) 522 1611 kHz

L (AM) 153 279 kHz

A Option B HU-850 must be connected to an external amplifier.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 238

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239

G 02

71 95

Phone system components

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 239

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General rules

Put traffic safety first! If when driving you require to use the privacy handset in the armrest, park the car in a safe place first.

Switch off the phone when refuelling.

Switch off the phone in areas where blast- ing work is being carried out.

Only allow authorised personnel service your phone.

Emergency calls

Emergency calls to emergency services can be

made without the ignition key or the SIM card.

1.

2. Ring the emergency number that applies to

your region (within EU: 112).

3. Press the green button .

Phone system components

1. Keypad on centre console All phone functions can be controlled via the

keypad in the centre console.

2. Steering wheel keypad The majority of phone functions can be con-

trolled via the steering wheel keypad.

When the phone is active, the steering wheel

keypad can only be used for phone functions.

Phone information is shown continuously in the

display when the phone is activated. The

phone must be deactivated in order to use the

buttons for radio settings, see page 241.

3. Display The display will show menu functions, mes-

sages, phone numbers, etc.

4. Privacy handset The privacy handset can be used for private

conversations when you do not wish to be dis-

turbed.

5. SIM card The SIM card is inserted below the keypad in

the centre console.

Switch off the phone whenever a SIM card is

not in use. Otherwise, messages from other

functions cannot be shown in the display.

6. Microphone The microphone is integrated in the rearview

mirror.

7. Loudspeaker The speaker is integrated in the driver's seat

head restraint.

8. Antenna The antenna is mounted against the wind-

screen in front of the rearview mirror.

SIM card

G 02

72 86

The phone can only be used with a valid SIM

card (Subscriber Identity Module). Your net-

work operator supplies this card.

Always insert the SIM card when you wish to

use the phone. The name of your network oper-

ator will be displayed.

Switch off the phone whenever a SIM card is

not in use. Otherwise, messages from other

functions cannot be displayed and the radio

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 240

evastarck

Press the On/Off button

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241

controls in the steering wheel keypad cannot

be used.

Switching the phone on and off

G 02

72 85

To switch the phone on 1. Turn the ignition key to position I.

2. Press the button marked in the illustration.

To switch the phone off Press the same button for three seconds.

If you switch off the car's ignition while the

phone is switched on, it will be on the next time

you switch on the ignition.

Phone calls cannot be received if the phone is

switched off.

Active mode

The phone must be in active mode for its func-

tions to be available for use (does not apply to

receiving calls). Activate the phone by pressing

in the keypad in the centre console or in

the steering wheel keypad.

Phone information is shown continuously in the

display when the phone is activated.

Press to deactivate the phone.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 241

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Call options

10

242

Display

G 02

71 80

The display will show the function in use, for

example menu selections, messages, phone

numbers or settings.

Making and receiving calls

To dial

Dial the number and press on the steer-

ing wheel or centre console keypad (or lift the

handset).

To receive an incoming call

Press (or lift the handset). You can also

use Automatic Answer. See menu function 4.3.

The car's audio system can be muted auto-

matically while a phone call is in progress. With

regard to the audio equipment sound level, see

also menu option 5.6.5 on page 250.

Ending a call

To end a call, press on one of the key-

pads or hang up the handset. The audio sys-

tem resumes its previous activity.

Last dialled numbers

The phone automatically stores the last phone

numbers/names called.

1. Press on the steering wheel or cen-

tre console keypad.

2. Use the arrows to scroll forward or

backward through the last num-

bers dialled.

3. Press (or lift the privacy handset) to

make the call.

Privacy handset

G 02

71 93

If you wish to talk undisturbed, use the privacy

handset.

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the number on the centre console key-

pad.

3. Press to dial.

Adjust the volume with the dial on the side of

the handset. The call is ended when you

replace the handset in its holder.

If you wish to switch to handsfree

without ending the call 1.

Press and select Handsfree.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 242

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Call options

10

243

2. Press and hang up the handset, see

page 242.

Speed dial

Storing speed dial numbers A number stored in the phone book can be

linked to a speed dial button (1 - 9). Proceed as

follows:

1. Scroll with to Edit memory (Menu

3) and press .

2. Scroll to Speed dial (Menu 3.4) and press

.

3. Select which number is to be the speed dial

number. Press to confirm.

4. Find the desired name or phone number in

the memory and press to select it.

Using speed dial Press the desired speed dial button for about

two seconds to make a call.

NOTE

Once you switch on the phone, wait a moment before using speed dial. If you wish to use a speed dial number then Menu 4.5 must be activated.see page 250

Functions during a call

The following functions are available during a

call:

Scroll with the arrows and press to

make a selection.

Secret mode/ Secret mode off

Secret mode

Hold/Don't hold Choose whether or

not the call is to be

put on hold

Handset/Handsfree Use the handset or

handsfree

Memory Show stored num-

bers

The following functions are available when you

have a current call and a parked call:

Scroll with the arrows and press to

make a selection.

Secret mode/ Secret mode off

Secret mode

Handset/Handsfree Use the handset or

handsfree

Memory Show stored num-

bers

Three-way calling Speak with both

parties simultane-

ously (conference

call)

Switch Switch between the

two calls

The following functions are available when you

have selected Three-way calling and have

two calls in progress:

Scroll with the arrows and press to

make a selection.

Secret mode/ Secret mode off

Secret mode

Handset/Handsfree Use the handset or

handsfree

Memory Show stored num-

bers

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 243

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Call options

10

244

Call waiting

If you hear a tone in the speaker when the

phone is engaged followed by a two-tone sig-

nal, another party is placing a call to your

phone. The two-tone signal will repeat until you

answer the call or ringing ceases. When this

occurs, you may accept or decline the call.

If you do not wish to take the call, press

or do nothing. If you do wish to take the

call, press . Your current call will be put

in "park mode". If you press , both calls

will be terminated.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 244

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Memory functions

10

245

SMS

A single two-tone signal indicates that you

have received an SMS message.

Volume

Raise the volume with the (+) button in the

steering wheel keypad. Lower the volume with

the () button.

When the phone is activated, the steering

wheel keypad only controls the phone func-

tions.

If you wish to adjust radio settings using these

buttons you must first deactivate the phone,

see page 241.

Storing in the memory

Phone numbers and names can be stored in

either the phone memory or the SIM card mem-

ory.

When you accept a phone call from a party

whose number is stored in the memory, their

name will be shown in the display.

The phone memory can store up to 255 names.

Storing phone numbers with names

1. Press and scroll to Edit memory

(Menu 3). Press .

2. Scroll to New number (Menu 3.1) and

press .

3. Enter a number and press .

4. Enter a name and press .

5. Choose in which memory to save with

and press .

Enter a name (or message)

Press the button with the desired character:

once for the first character, twice for the sec-

ond, etc. Press 1 to enter a space.

space 1- ? ! , . : ' ( )

a b c 2

d e f 3

g h i 4

j k l 5

m n o 6

p q r s 7

t u v 8

w x y z 9

if you enter two letters in a row

from the same button,

press * between them or wait

a few seconds

+ 0 @ * # & $ / %

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 245

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Memory functions

10

246

change between upper and

lower case letters

delete the last letter or number

entered. If you press for a long

time, the enter number or text

is deleted.

Dialling from the memory

Press in the centre console or in

the steering wheel keypad.

Choose from the following alternatives:

1. Press in the centre console or in the

steering wheel keypad and browse with the

arrows until you locate the required name.

2. Press the key of the first letter in the name

(or enter the name) and press .

3. Press to dial the selected number.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 246

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Menu functions

10

247

General

Use the menu function when checking func-

tions, changing settings and programming new

functions in your system. The various menu

selections will be shown in the display.

Press to access the menu function.

The following applies in the menu function:

A long press on means you exit the

menu function.

A short press on means that you

retract, cancel or reject an alternative.

A press on means that you confirm

or select, or that you scroll from a submenu to the next submenu.

The right arrow leads to the next

side menu.

The left arrow leads to the previ-

ous side menu.

Shortcuts The menu options are numbered and can be

selected directly using the number keys and

. The numbers are shown in the display

together with the menu option.

Traffic safety For reasons of safety, the menu system cannot

be accessed at speeds in excess of 8 km/h.

You may only complete activities in the menu

system that have already been started.

The speed limiter can be disconnected using

menu function 5.7.

Main menus/submenus

1. Call register

1.1. Missed calls

1.2. Received calls

1.3. Dialled calls

1.4. Erase list

1.4.1. All

1.4.2. Missed

1.4.3. Received

1.4.4. Dialled

1.5. Call duration

1.5.1. Last call

1.5.2. Call count

1.5.3. Total time

1.5.4. Clear

2. Messages

2.1. Read

2.2. Write

2.3. Voice message

2.4. Settings

2.4.1. SMSC number

2.4.2. Validity

2.4.3. Type

3. Edit memory

3.1. New number

3.2. Search

3.2.1. Edit

3.2.2. Erase

3.2.3. Copy

3.2.4. Move

3.3. Copy all

3.3.1. SIM to phone

3.3.2. Phone to SIM

3.4. Speed dial

3.5. Erase SIM

3.6. Empty memory

3.7. Status

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 247

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Menu functions

10

248

4. Call options

4.1. Send my no.

4.2. Call waiting

4.3. Auto answer

4.4. Auto redial

4.5. Speed dial

4.6. Call divert service

4.6.1. All calls

4.6.2. When engag.

4.6.3. Not answered

4.6.4. Not available

4.6.5. Fax calls

4.6.6. Data calls

4.6.7. Cancel all

5. Settings

5.1. Factory sett.

5.2. Network

5.3. Language

5.3.1. English UK

5.3.2. English US

5.3.3. Svenska

5.3.4. Dansk

5.3.5. Suomi

5.3.6. Deutsch

5.3.7. Nederlands

5.3.8. Franais FR

5.3.9. Franais CAN

5.3.10. Italiano

5.3.11. Espaol

5.3.12. Portugus P

5.3.13. Portugus BR

5.4. SIM security

5.4.1. On

5.4.2. Off

5.4.3. AUTO

5.5. Change codes

5.5.1. PIN code

5.5.2. Phone code

5.6. Sounds

5.6.1. Ringer volume

5.6.2. Ring signal

5.6.3. Button click

5.6.4. Speed volume

5.6.5. Radio Auto Suppres-

sion

5.6.6. New SMS

5.7. Traffic safety

Menu options, description

1. Call register

1.1. Missed calls A list of missed calls is shown here. You can

choose to call, erase or store the number in the

phone or SIM card memory for later use.

1.2. Received calls A list of received calls is shown here. You can

choose to call, erase or store the number in the

phone or SIM card memory for later use.

1.3. Dialled calls A list of dialled numbers is shown here. You can

choose to call, erase or store the number in the

phone or SIM card memory for later use.

1.4. Erase list This option can be used to erase the list of

menus 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 as follows.

1.4.1. All

1.4.2. Missed

1.4.3. Received

1.4.4. Dialled

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 248

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Menu functions

10

249

1.5. Call duration Here you can see the duration of all your calls

or the most recent. You can also see the num-

ber of calls and clear the call timer.

1.5.1. Last call

1.5.2. Call count

1.5.3. Total time

1.5.4. Clear

Resetting the call timer requires the phone

code (see Menu 5.5).

2. Messages

2.1. Read Here you can read received text messages.

You can then choose to erase the message,

forward it, change or save the entire message

or parts of it.

2.2. Write You can write a text message using the key-

pad. Then choose to save or send it.

2.3. Voice message Listen to received messages.

2.4. Settings Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes-

sage centre to which you want your messages

transferred. Specify how the message is to

reach the addressee and how long it is to be

stored in the message centre.

2.4.1. SMSC number

2.4.2. Validity

2.4.3. Type

Contact your service provider for information

on these settings and for an SMSC number.

3. Edit memory

3.1. New number You can store names and phone numbers in

the phone or SIM card memory. See the sec-

tion on memory functions for more information.

3.2. Search Changes in the memory can be made here.

3.2.1. Edit: Change data in the different

memories.

3.2.2. Erase: Remove a saved name.

3.2.3. Copy: Copy a saved name.

3.2.4. Move: Transfer information between

the memory of the phone and the SIM

card.

3.3. Copy all: Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM

card to the phone memory.

3.3.1. From SIM to phone memory

3.3.2. From phone to SIM memory

3.4. Speed dial A number stored in the phone book can be

stored as a speed dial number.

3.5. Erase SIM The entire memory of the SIM card can be

erased.

3.6. Empty memory The entire memory of the phone can be erased.

3.7. Status See how many places in the SIM card or phone

memory are occupied by names and numbers.

4. Call options

4.1. Send my no. Select whether or not your own number should

be displayed to the person you call. Contact

your network operator regarding permanently

withheld numbers.

4.2. Call waiting Choose whether or not you want to be alerted

during a phone call that there is another call

coming in.

4.3. Auto answer Chose to answer without using the keypad.

4.4. Automatic redial Choose to call a previously dialled number that

was busy.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 249

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Menu functions

10

250

4.5. Speed dial Here you set whether or not speed dial is to be

active. The function must be activated if you

wish to dial using speed dial numbers.

4.6. Diversions Here you can choose when and what type of

calls are to be diverted to a specified phone

number.

When engag.

All calls (this setting only applies during

the call in progress).

4.6.3. Not answered

4.6.4. Not available

4.6.5. Fax calls

4.6.6. Data calls

4.6.7. Cancel all

5. Settings

5.1. Factory settings Function to return to the system's factory set-

tings.

5.2. Network selection

5.3. Language Here you can choose which language the

phone is to display.

5.3.1. English UK

5.3.2. English US

5.3.3. Svenska

5.3.4. Dansk

5.3.5. Suomi

5.3.6. Deutsch

5.3.7. Nederlands

5.3.8. Franais FR

5.3.9. Franais CAN

5.3.10. Italiano

5.3.11. Espaol

5.3.12. Portugus P

4.9.13. Portugus BR

5.4. SIM security Choose if the PIN code is to be on, off, or auto-

matic.

5.4.1. On

5.4.2. Off

5.4.3. AUTO

5.5. Change codes Change the PIN code or phone code.

5.5.1. PIN code

5.5.2. Phone code (use 1234 until you

change to your own code). The phone

code is used to reset the call timer.

NOTE

Make a note of your code as save it in a safe place.

5.6. Volume 5.6.1 . Ringer volume: Here you can choose

the volume of the ringer for incoming

calls.

5.6.2. Ring signal: You have eight different

types of ring signals to choose from.

5.6.3. Button click: On or Off.

5.6.4. Speed volume: Choose whether the

volume should be adjusted according

to speed.

5.6.5. Radio Auto Suppression: Here you

choose whether or not the volume of

the radio should remain the same dur-

ing phone calls.

5.6.6. Select whether or not you wish the

phone to notify of new SMS messages

with an audible signal.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 250

evastarck

4.6.1.

4.6.2.

10 Infotainment system

Menu functions

10

251

5.7. Traffic safety Here you can choose to disengage the speed

limiter for the menu system, i.e. choose to use

the menu system even while driving.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 251

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

Miscellaneous information

10

252

Radio/Phone

G 02

72 88

The four lower buttons on the steering wheel

keypad are common to the audio system and

phone.

The phone must be in active mode in order to

adjust the phone functions with these buttons,

see page 241.

If you wish to adjust radio settings using these

buttons you must first deactivate the phone.

Press .

Double SIM cards 1

G 02

72 86

Many network operators offer double SIM

cards - one for your car and one for another

phone. A double SIM card allows you to have

the same number for two different phones.

Ask your network operator about the options

available and the use of double SIM cards.

Specifications

Output 2 W

SIM card Small

Memory entries 255 A

SMS

(Short Message

Service)

Yes

Data/Fax No

Dualband Yes (900/1800)

A The phone memory contains 255 positions. The number of SIM card memory positions varies depending on your sub- scription.

IMEI number

To block the phone, you must provide your

network operator with the phone's IMEI num-

ber. This is a 15-digit serial number that is

programmed in the phone.

Dial *#06# to show this number in the dis-

play.

Make a note of this number and keep it in a safe

place.

1 Certain markets

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 252

evastarck

10 Infotainment system

10

253

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 253

evastarck

G 00

00 00

254

Type designation................................................................................... 256

Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 258

Engine specifications............................................................................ 260

Engine oil............................................................................................... 262

Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 264

Fuel....................................................................................................... 266

Catalytic converter................................................................................ 269

Electrical system................................................................................... 270

Type approval....................................................................................... 272

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 254

evastarck

11 SPECIF ICATIONS

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 255

evastarck

11 Specifications

Type designation

11

256

G 03

20 69

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 256

evastarck

11 Specifications

Type designation

11

257

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle

identification and engine numbers can facili-

tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer

regarding the car and when ordering spare

parts and accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identification

number, maximum permissible weights,

codes for colour and upholstery and type

approval number.

Label for parking heater.

Engine type designation, component and

serial number.

The engine oil decal (certain engine vari-

ants) specifies oil grade and viscosity.

Gearbox type designation and serial num-

ber

Manual gearbox.

Automatic gearbox AW

VIN number (type and model year desig-

nation plus chassis number).

Further information on the car is presented in

the registration document.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 257

evastarck

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

258

Dimensions

G020131

Posi- tion in illus- tra- tion

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2715

B Length 4603

C Load length,

floor, folded seat

1661

D Load length, floor 824

Posi- tion in illus- tra- tion

Dimensions mm

E Height 1428

F Front track 1561

G Rear track 1542

Posi- tion in illus- tra- tion

Dimensions mm

H Width 1871

I Width including

door mirrors

2069

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 258

evastarck

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

259

Weights

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank

90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories,

such as a towbar, load carriers, space box etc.

and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see

table), influences the payload and must not be

included in the kerb weight.

Permitted weight (in addition to driver) = Gross

vehicle weight - Kerb weight.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

G 01

60 08

Max. total weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Maximum roof load: 100 kg

Trailer with brakes:

Maximum trailer weight (kg)

Maximum tow- ball load (kg)

0-1200 50

1201-1600 75

Trailer without brakes

Maximum trailer weight kg

Maximum tow- ball load kg

750 50

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 259

evastarck

11 Specifications

Engine specifications

11

260

2.4 2.4i 2.0T 2.5T 2.4T

Engine designation A B5244S2 B5244S B5204T5 B5254T2 B5244T4 B

Output (kW/rpm) 103/4500 125/6000 132/5500 154/5000 162/5500

(hp/rpm) 140/4500 170/6000 180/5500 210/5000 220/5500

Torque (Nm/rpm) 220/3300 225/4500 240/1850-5000 320/1500-4500 350/2100-4000

No. of cylinders 5 5 5 5 5

Bore (mm) 83 83 81 83 81

Stroke (mm) 90 90 77 93.2 93.2

Swept volume (litres) 2.44 2.44 1.98 2.52 2.4

Compression ratio 10.3:1 10.3:1 9.5:1 9.0:1 8.5:1

A Engine type designation, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 256. B Thailand, Malaysia

T5 D 2.4D D5

Engine designation A B5244T5 D5244T7 D5244T5 D5244T4

Output (kW/rpm) 191/5500 92/4000 120/5500 136/4000

(hp/rpm) 260/5500 126/4000 163/5500 185/4000

Torque (Nm/rpm) 350/2100-5000 300/1750-2250 340/1750-2750 400/2000-2750

No. of cylinders 5 5 5 5

Bore (mm) 81 81 81 81

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 260

evastarck

11 Specifications

Engine specifications

11

261

T5 D 2.4D D5

Stroke (mm) 93.2 93.2 93.2 93.2

Swept volume (litres) 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.40

Compression ratio 8.5:1 17.0:1 17.0:1 17.0:1

A Engine type designation, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 256.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 261

evastarck

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

262

Adverse driving conditions

Check the oil level more frequently for long

journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer.

in mountainous regions.

at high speeds.

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C.

This can produce abnormally high oil tempera-

ture or oil consumption.

Also check the oil level more often if the car is

often driven short distances (less than 10 km)

when temperatures are low (below +5 C).

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse

driving conditions. It provides extra protection

for the engine.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, other- wise you will risk affecting service life, star- ting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Viscosity chart

G 02

02 36

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 262

evastarck

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

263

Oil decal

Engine variant Filling volume between MIN MAX (litres)

Volume A (litres)

G 03

20 78

The adjacent oil decal shown here is fitted in the

car's engine compartment, see page 256.

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

2.0T B5204T5 1.2 5.5

2.4 B5244S

B5244S2

2.4T B5244T4 B

T5 B5244T5

2.5T B5254T2

D5 D5244T4 2.0 6.2

2.4D D5244T5

D D5244T7

A Including filter change. B Thailand, Malaysia

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 263

evastarck

11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

11

264

Fluid System Volume (litres) Recommended oil grade:

Gearbox oil Manual 5 speed (M56/M58) 2.1 Transmission fluid: MTF 97309

Manual 6-speed (M66) 2.0 Transmission fluid: MTF 97309

Automatic gearbox (AW55-50,

AW55-51)

7.2 Transmission fluid JWS 3309

Automatic gearbox (TF-80SC) 7.0

Coolant Petrol engine without turbo 8.0 Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with

water A, see packaging. The thermostat starts

opening at: 90 C in petrol engines and at 82 C

in diesel engines.

Petrol engine with turbo 9.0

Diesel 12.5

Air conditioning B Oil: PAG

Refrigerant R134a (HFC134a)

Brake fluid 0.6 DOT 4+

Power steering System:

of which reservoir

0.9

0.2

Power steering fluid: WSS M2C204-A or equiv-

alent product.

Washer fluid without high-pressure washing 4.5 Use a washer antifreeze recommended by

Volvo, mixed with water for temperatures below

freezing.with high-pressure washing 6.4

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Weights may vary depending on the engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the exact information.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 264

evastarck

11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

11

265

IMPORTANT

The recommended transmission fluid must be used to prevent damage to the gearbox. Do not mix with any other transmission fluid. If the transmission is topped up with a dif- ferent fluid, contact an authorised Volvo workshop for servicing.

NOTE

Under normal driving conditions the gear- box oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions, see page 262

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 265

evastarck

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

266

Consumption, emissions and volume

Engine Gearbox Consumption litre/100 km

Emissions of carbon dioxide (CO2) g/km

Tank vol- ume (litres)

2.4 B5244S2 Manual 5 speed (M56) 8.8 209 70

2.4 B5244S2 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.5 226 70

2.4i B5244S Manual 5 speed (M56) 8.9 212 70

2.4i B5244S Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.5 226 70

2.0T B5204T5 Manual 5 speed (M56) 8.9 212 70

2.0T B5254T5 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.5 227 70

2.5T B5254T2 Manual 5 speed (M56) 9.1 217 70

2.5T B5254T2 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.8 234 70

2.5T B5254T2

AWD

Manual 5-speed (M58) 9.7 232 72

2.5T B5254T2

AWD

Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 10.2 244 72

2.4T B5244T4* 70

T5 B5244T5 Manual 6-speed (M66) 9.3 220 70

T5 B5244T5 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.8 234 70

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 266

evastarck

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

267

Engine Gearbox Consumption litre/100 km

Emissions of carbon diox- ide (CO2) g/km

Tank volume (litres)

D5 D5244T4 Automatic gearbox (TF-80SC) 7.5 199 70

D5 D5244T4 Manual 6-speed (M66) 6.6 174 70

2.4D D5244T5 Automatic gearbox (TF-80SC) 7.5 199 70

2.4D D5244T5 Manual 6-speed (M66) 6.6 174 70

2.4D D5244T5 Manual 5 speed (M56) 6.4 169 70

D D5244T7 Manual 5 speed (M56) 6.4 169 70

Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide

Official fuel consumption figures are based on

a standard driving cycle in accordance with EU

Directive 80/1268comb. Fuel consumption fig-

ures may change if the car is equipped with

extra equipment that affects the car's weight.

The manner in which the car is driven, and

other non-technical factors can also affect fuel

consumption. Consumption is higher and

power output lower for fuel with an octane rat-

ing of 91 RON.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, towing a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

Petrol

Most engines can be run with octane ratings of

91, 95 and 98 RON.

91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder engines and should only be used in excep- tional cases with other engines.

95 RON can be used for normal driving.

98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C,

fuel with the highest possible octane rating is

recommended for optimum performance and

fuel economy.

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 267

evastarck

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

268

Petrol Norm EN 228

IMPORTANT

Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter. In order for the Volvo warranty to apply, never mix alcohol with petrol, the fuel system could be damaged.

Diesel

The diesel engine's fuel system is sensitive to

contaminants. Only use diesel from well-

known oil companies, see page 188.

Diesel Norm EN 590 or JIS K2204

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 268

evastarck

11 Specifications

Catalytic converter

11

269

General

The purpose of the catalytic converter is to

purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of

exhaust gases close to the engine so that it

quickly reaches operating temperature. The

catalytic converter consists of a monolith

(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel

walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum,

rhodium and palladium. These metals act as

catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate

a chemical reaction without being used up

themselves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor

The Lambda-sond is part of a control system

intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel

economy.

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content

of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This

value is fed into an electronic system that con-

tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel

to air directed to the engine is continuously

adjusted. Together with the three-way catalytic

converter, these adjustments create optimal

conditions for efficient combustion of the

harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon

monoxide and nitrous oxides).

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 269

evastarck

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

270

General

12 V system with a voltage-regulated alterna-

tor. Single pole system in which the chassis

and engine block are used as conductors.

Battery

Voltage 12 V 12 V 12 V

Cold start capacity (CCA) 590 A 600 A A 700 A B

Reserve capacity (RC) 100 min 120 min 135 min

Capacity (Ah) 60 70 80

A Cars equipped with High Performance audio system. B Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.

If the battery is changed, replace it with a bat-

tery of the same cold start capacity and reserve

capacity as the original (see the decal on the

battery).

Bulbs

Lighting Output W Socket

Dipped beam 55 H7

Bi-Xenon 35 D2S

Main beam 55 HB3

Brake lights, reversing lamps, rear fog lamp 21 BA15s

Direction indicators, rear/front (yellow) 21 BAU15s

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 270

evastarck

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

271

Lighting Output W Socket

Rear position/parking lamps, rear side marker lamps 5 BAY15d

Courtesy lighting, cargo area lighting, number plate lighting 5 SV8.5

Vanity mirror 1.2 SV5.5

Front position/parking lamps, front side marker lamps 5 W 2.1 x 9.5d

Direction indicators in door mirrors (yellow) 5 W 2.1 x 9.5d

Fog lamps 55 H11

Glovebox lighting 3 BA9

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 271

evastarck

11 Specifications

Type approval

11

272

Remote control system

Country

A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,

E, EST, F, FIN, GB,

GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,

LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,

SK, SLO

Delphi hereby

certifies that this

remote control sys-

tem conforms to the

essential character-

istic requirements

and other relevant

regulations of direc-

tive 1999/5/EC.

IS, LI, N, CH

HR

RC

ETC093LPD0155

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 272

evastarck

12 Alphabetical Index

12

273

A

A/C

manual climate control......................... 76

ABS fault.................................................... 44

Active Bi-Xenon Lights...................... 50, 52

Active chassis FOUR-C.................. 48, 129

Adaptive system...................................... 123

Additional heater........................................ 84

Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 145

Bi-Xenon headlamp......................... 149

Halogen headlamp............................. 146

Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 60

AF automatic frequency update........... 229

Airbag

activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22

driver's and front passenger side......... 19

Air conditioning

ECC...................................................... 78

general.................................................. 74

Air conditioning, AC................................... 76

Air distribution...................................... 75, 81

Air distribution, A/C................................... 77

Air vents

instrument panel................................... 75

Alarm

alarm indicator.................................... 108

alarm signals....................................... 109

arming................................................. 108

automatic alarm activation................. 108

deactivating a triggered alarm............ 109

disarming............................................ 108

general................................................ 108

RDS traffic warning............................. 226

All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 124

Audio functions

HU-450............................................... 219

HU-450/650/850................................. 217

HU-650/850........................................ 220

Audio HU-450, overview.......................... 214

Audio HU-650, overview.......................... 215

Audio HU-850, overview.......................... 216

Audio volume

phone.................................................. 245

AUTO

climate control settings........................ 78

Automatic car washes............................. 176

Automatic gearbox.......................... 121, 123

Lock-up function................................ 123

safety systems.................................... 123

towing and recovery........................... 132

trailer................................................... 135

W button............................................. 122

Automatic locking.................................... 104

AUX.......................................................... 217

volume................................................ 217

Auxiliary lamps........................................... 50

Average fuel consumption......................... 54

AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 124

B

Backrest

front seat, lowering............................... 88

Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 96

Bag holder................................................. 97

Battery..................................................... 194

maintenance............................... 185, 194

specifications...................................... 270

start assistance................................... 134

warning symbols................................. 194

Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 153

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 48, 152

Bonnet..................................................... 186

Bonnet, opening...................................... 186

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 273

evastarck

12 Alphabetical Index

12

274

Booster cushion, integrated...................... 33

Bottle holder for rear seat passengers...... 95

Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 192

Brakes

Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 125

handbrake............................................. 46

Brake system........................................... 125

Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 196, 270

C

Calls

functions during a call........................ 243

Car care................................................... 176

Car care, leather upholstery.................... 178

Cargo area................................................. 97

bag holder............................................. 97

locking.................................................. 49

Car upholstery......................................... 178

Car wash.................................................. 176

Cassette player, HU-450......................... 231

Catalytic converter................................... 269

recovery.............................................. 133

CD changer, external............................... 235

CD player, HU-650.................................. 233

Chassis settings....................................... 129

Checking and topping up the coolant..... 191

Checks

fluids and oils...................................... 189

Children..................................................... 30

child safety locks................................ 107

child seats and side airbags................. 24

location in the car................................. 30

location in the car, table....................... 31

safety.................................................... 30

Child seat................................................... 30

Child seats................................................. 30

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 34

recommended...................................... 31

Cigarette lighter socket.............................. 49

rear seat................................................ 61

Cleaning

automatic car washes......................... 176

car wash............................................. 176

rims..................................................... 176

seatbelts............................................. 178

upholstery........................................... 178

water-repellent surface......................... 68

Clock, setting............................................. 42

Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 192

Coat hanger............................................... 95

Cold start

automatic gearbox.............................. 123

Collision

crash mode........................................... 29

Inflatable Curtain, IC............................. 26

Colour code, paint................................... 179

Combined instrument panel...................... 42

Compass.................................................... 64

calibration............................................. 67

setting the zone.................................... 64

Condensation in headlamps.................... 176

Control panel............................................. 76

Coolant.................................................... 191

Cruise control............................................ 58

Cup holder..................................... 93, 94, 95

D

Deadlocks

temporary deactivation....................... 106

temporary deactivation of the alarm

detectors....................................... 49, 109

Defroster.............................................. 77, 78

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 274

evastarck

12 Alphabetical Index

12

275

Diesel....................................................... 188

Diesel: engine preheater............................ 46

Diesel particle filter.................................. 117

Direction indicators.................................... 53

Display, messages............................... 47, 82

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 236

Door mirrors............................................... 67

Driveable punctured tyres........................ 166

Driver's door control panel............ 38, 40, 62

Driving

with trailer........................................... 135

Driving with a trailer

towball load........................................ 259

towing capacity.......................... 135, 259

DSTC, see also Stability control sys-

tem............................................... 46, 48, 127

operation............................................. 127

During a call, functions............................ 243

E

ECO pressure.......................................... 161

table.................................................... 162

Electrical socket

centre console...................................... 49

rear seat................................................ 61

Electrical system...................................... 270

Emergency calls....................................... 240

Emergency equipment

warning triangle.................................. 163

Emergency puncture repair..................... 169

Emission control

fault indicator........................................ 45

Engine compartment

coolant................................................ 191

oil........................................................ 189

overview.............................................. 187

power steering fluid............................ 192

Engine oil......................................... 189, 262

adverse driving conditions.......... 189, 262

capacities........................................... 262

changing............................................. 189

filter..................................................... 189

oil grade.............................................. 262

oil pressure........................................... 45

Engine preheater........................................ 46

Engine specifications............................... 260

EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 230

Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17

External audio source

AUX-socket......................................... 217

External dimensions................................ 258

F

Fan

A/C........................................................ 76

ECC...................................................... 78

First aid equipment.................................. 164

Floor mats.................................................. 88

Fluids, capacities..................................... 264

Fluids and oils.......................................... 264

Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart-

ment......................................................... 189

Fluids and oils general............................. 185

Fog lamp

front...................................................... 52

Fog lamps

rear........................................................ 52

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 275

evastarck

12 Alphabetical Index

12

276

FOUR-C Active chassis.................. 48, 129

Frequency update, automatic.................. 229

Fuel

fuel consumption, display..................... 54

fuel economy...................................... 161

Fuses....................................................... 203

box in cargo area................................ 209

box in the engine compartment.......... 204

changing............................................. 203

dashboard end................................... 206

general................................................ 203

within the sound barrier...................... 207

G

Gearbox

automatic............................................ 121

manual................................................ 120

Glovebox.................................................... 94

Gross vehicle weight............................... 259

H

Handbrake........................................... 46, 60

Hazard warning flashers............................ 50

Headlamp levelling.................................... 51

Headlamp pattern, adjusting................... 145

Headlamps

ABL....................................................... 52

Off/On................................................... 51

Headlamp washers.................................... 57

Head restraint

centre seat, rear.................................... 96

lowering................................................ 49

Heated front seats..................................... 76

Heating

front seats............................................. 50

rearview and door mirrors........ 50, 76, 78

rear window.............................. 50, 76, 78

High-pressure headlamp washing............. 57

Home safe lighting

setting................................................... 53

HU-450, overview............................ 214, 215

HU-850, overview.................................... 216

I

IMEI number............................................ 252

Immobiliser.............................................. 102

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 26

Information display.................................... 47

Instrument lighting..................................... 52

Instrument overview

left-hand drive....................................... 38

right-hand drive.................................... 40

Integrated booster cushion........................ 33

Interior lighting........................................... 90

Interior rearview mirror............................... 64

automatic dimming............................... 64

Intermittent wiping..................................... 56

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 34

J

Jack......................................................... 163

K

Kerb weight.............................................. 259

Key........................................................... 102

remote control key.............................. 102

Keypad in the steering wheel............ 58, 222

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 276

evastarck

12 Alphabetical Index

12

277

Kick-down

automatic gearbox.............................. 122

L

Lambda-sond.......................................... 269

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 178

Lighting

Active Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL........ 50, 52

automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 51

automatic lighting, passenger compart-

ment...................................................... 91

bulbs, specifications........................... 270

exterior.................................................. 51

headlamp levelling................................ 51

home safe lighting................................ 53

in passenger compartment................... 90

instrument lighting................................ 52

Lighting panel, passenger compart-

ment...................................................... 51

main/dipped beam............................... 51

position/parking lamps......................... 51

reading lamps....................................... 90

rear fog lamp........................................ 52

switching headlamp pattern right/left-

hand traffic, ABL;.......................... 50, 145

Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 196

bulb location front lamp...................... 196

cargo area........................................... 200

courtesy lighting................................. 202

dipped beam halogen......................... 197

direction indicators............................. 198

fog lamp.............................................. 199

front.................................................... 196

main beam.......................................... 197

number plate lighting.......................... 200

parking lamps..................................... 198

position lamps.................................... 198

rear lamp............................................. 201

side marker lamps.............................. 199

vanity mirror........................................ 202

Loading

load capacity...................................... 143

load carriers........................................ 143

roof load............................................. 143

Load on the roof...................................... 143

Locking/unlocking

inside.................................................. 105

outside................................................ 104

Locks

boot lid.................................................. 49

Lubricants................................................ 264

Lubricants, capacities.............................. 264

M

Main and dipped beam

switching............................................... 53

Main beam "flash"..................................... 53

Maintenance............................................ 185

rustproofing........................................ 180

self-maintenance................................ 185

Manual gearbox....................................... 120

towing and recovery........................... 132

Master key............................................... 102

Menu functions, phone............................ 247

Menu structure

phone, menu options.......................... 248

Messages in BLIS.................................... 154

Messages in the information display......... 47

Meters in the combined instrument panel

fuel gauge............................................. 42

outside temperature gauge.................. 42

speedometer......................................... 42

tachometer........................................... 42

trip meter.............................................. 42

Misting....................................................... 74

condensation in headlamps............... 176

rear window.......................................... 50

removing with defroster function.... 77, 78

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 277

evastarck

12 Alphabetical Index

12

278

N

NEWS...................................................... 217

O

Oil, see also Engine oil............... 45, 189, 262

One-key dial............................................. 243

Oxyhydrogen gas..................................... 134

P

PACOS....................................................... 22

key switch off........................................ 22

PACOS, switch.......................................... 22

Paintwork

colour code......................................... 179

damage and touch-up........................ 179

Panel vents in the door pillar..................... 75

Parking assistance............................. 49, 130

parking assistance sensors................ 131

Parking brake....................................... 46, 60

Parking heater

battery and fuel..................................... 83

general.................................................. 82

Parking lamps............................................ 51

Particle filter....................................... 74, 117

Phone

ending a call....................................... 242

last dialled numbers........................... 242

making calls........................................ 242

memory............................................... 245

on/off.................................................. 241

one-key dial........................................ 243

privacy handset.................................. 242

SIM card............................................. 240

Phone system.......................................... 240

Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 70

Polishing.................................................. 177

Position lamps........................................... 51

Power seat................................................. 89

Power steering fluid, checking and topping

up............................................................. 192

Power sunroof........................................... 69

Power windows......................................... 62

blocking................................................ 63

passenger seat..................................... 63

rear seat................................................ 63

Privacy handset....................................... 242

PTY Programme type.................... 217, 228

Puncture, see Tyres......................... 163, 167

R

Radio

EON.................................................... 230

frequency update................................ 229

NEWS................................................. 227

PTY..................................................... 228

traffic information................................ 226

tuning.................................................. 222

Radio functions

HU-450............................................... 224

HU-450/650/850................................. 222

Radio text................................................ 230

Rain sensor................................................ 56

RDS functions.......................................... 226

Reading lamps........................................... 90

Rear seat, lowering.................................... 96

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 278

evastarck

12 Alphabetical Index

12

279

Rearview and door mirrors

compass............................................... 64

door...................................................... 67

electrically retractable........................... 67

heating.................................................. 50

interior................................................... 64

retractable............................................. 49

Rear window, defrosting............................ 50

Recirculation

A/C........................................................ 77

Refrigerant................................................. 74

REG - Regional radio programmes......... 229

Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 203

Remote control........................................ 102

functions............................................. 102

replacing the battery........................... 103

Remote control system, type approval.... 272

Resetting the door mirrors......................... 49

Retractable power door mirrors (option). . . 49

Rims

cleaning.............................................. 176

Roof load................................................. 143

Rustproofing............................................ 180

S

SCAN

CD and audio files.............................. 235

radio stations...................................... 222

Seatbelt

pregnancy............................................. 17

Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17

Seatbelts.................................................... 16

Seatbelt tensioner...................................... 18

Seats

heating.................................................. 50

lowering the front backrest................... 88

lowering the rear backrest.................... 96

manual setting...................................... 88

power seat............................................ 89

Service key.............................................. 102

Service programme................................. 184

Settings, clock........................................... 83

Side airbags............................................... 24

SIM card.................................................. 240

double................................................. 252

SIPS bags.................................................. 24

SMS......................................................... 245

Soot filter........................................... 47, 117

SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 117

Spare wheel............................................. 163

Temporary spare................................ 163

Spin control............................................. 127

Spin Control............................................. 127

Spin control function............................... 127

SRS system............................................... 19

general.................................................. 19

SST Self Supporting run flat Tyres....... 166

Stability system........................................ 127

deactivating/activating....................... 127

indicator................................................ 46

symbols.............................................. 127

Stains....................................................... 178

Start assistance....................................... 134

Steering wheel

cruise control........................................ 58

keypad.................................................. 58

steering wheel adjustment.................... 60

Stone chips and scratches...................... 179

Storage compartment.......................... 93, 94

Storage spaces in the passenger compart-

ment........................................................... 92

Sunroof...................................................... 69

opening and closing............................. 69

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 279

evastarck

12 Alphabetical Index

12

280

pinch protection.................................... 70

sunscreen............................................. 70

ventilation position................................ 69

Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 70

Switching

main and dipped beam......................... 53

Symbols

indicator symbols................................. 44

stability system................................... 127

warning symbols................................... 44

T

Tailgate

locking/unlocking................................ 102

Temperature

passenger compartment, electronic cli-

mate control.......................................... 78

passenger compartment, manual cli-

mate control.......................................... 76

Tools........................................................ 163

Towbar............................................. 135, 139

Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 137

Towing..................................................... 132

towing eye.......................................... 132

Towing capacity............................... 135, 259

Towing equipment................................... 135

general........................................ 135, 137

installation........................................... 139

removing............................................. 141

specifications...................................... 138

Towing eye............................................... 132

TPMS Tyre Pressure Monitoring........... 165

TP Traffic information.................... 217, 226

Traction control system........................... 127

Trailer....................................................... 135

cable................................................... 137

driving with a trailer............................ 135

Trip computer............................................ 54

Type approved, remote control system... 272

Type designation..................................... 256

Tyres

direction of rotation............................ 160

driving characteristics......................... 158

general................................................ 158

maintenance....................................... 158

pressure...................................... 161, 162

puncture repair................................... 169

specifications...................................... 158

speed ratings...................................... 158

tread wear indicators.......................... 159

tyre pressure monitoring..................... 165

winter tyres......................................... 160

V

Vibration damper..................................... 137

W

Warning lamp

stability and traction control system. . 127

Warning lamps

seatbelt reminder.................................. 17

Warning symbol, AIRBAG system............. 18

Warning triangle....................................... 163

Washer fluid, filling................................... 190

Washers

headlamps............................................ 57

windscreen........................................... 57

Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 68

Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 177

Waxing..................................................... 177

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 280

evastarck

12 Alphabetical Index

12

281

Weights

kerb weight......................................... 259

trailer weight....................................... 135

Wheels

changing............................................. 167

installation........................................... 168

removal............................................... 167

rims..................................................... 160

snow chains........................................ 159

spare wheel........................................ 163

Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 27

WHIPS

child seat/booster cushion................... 27

whiplash injury...................................... 27

Windscreen washing.................................. 57

Windscreen wipers.................................... 56

rain sensor............................................ 56

Winter tyres.............................................. 160

Wiper blades............................................ 193

changing............................................. 193

cleaning.............................................. 193

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 281

evastarck

12 Alphabetical Index

12

282

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 282

evastarck

Notes

283

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 283

evastarck

Notes

284

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 284

evastarck

Notes

285

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 285

evastarck

Notes

286

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 286

evastarck

Notes

287

P2 (S60); 5; 3 2008-02-25T13:11:14+01:00; Page 287

evastarck

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the S60 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo S60 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo S60. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo S60 Owners Manual 2009 as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.